WO2023231868A1 - 感知方式切换方法、装置、通信设备及存储介质 - Google Patents

感知方式切换方法、装置、通信设备及存储介质 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2023231868A1
WO2023231868A1 PCT/CN2023/096091 CN2023096091W WO2023231868A1 WO 2023231868 A1 WO2023231868 A1 WO 2023231868A1 CN 2023096091 W CN2023096091 W CN 2023096091W WO 2023231868 A1 WO2023231868 A1 WO 2023231868A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
sensing
node
target
measurement
mode
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2023/096091
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
李健之
姜大洁
丁圣利
Original Assignee
维沃移动通信有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 维沃移动通信有限公司 filed Critical 维沃移动通信有限公司
Publication of WO2023231868A1 publication Critical patent/WO2023231868A1/zh

Links

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W24/00—Supervisory, monitoring or testing arrangements
    • H04W24/02—Arrangements for optimising operational condition
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W24/00—Supervisory, monitoring or testing arrangements
    • H04W24/10—Scheduling measurement reports ; Arrangements for measurement reports
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00—Hand-off or reselection arrangements

Definitions

  • This application belongs to the field of communication sensing technology, and specifically relates to a sensing mode switching method, device, communication equipment and storage medium.
  • sensing nodes in mobile communication networks usually use a certain predetermined or preconfigured sensing method to perform sensing measurements on sensing targets (such as specific physical targets or specific areas).
  • sensing targets such as specific physical targets or specific areas.
  • the sensing node may not be able to perform accurate sensing measurements on the sensing target, which will lead to poor reliability of sensing measurements.
  • Embodiments of the present application provide a sensing mode switching method, device, communication equipment and storage medium, which can solve the problem of poor reliability of sensing measurement.
  • a sensing mode switching method which method includes:
  • the first device obtains a first measurement report.
  • the first measurement report is generated by the source node using a first sensing mode to perform a first sensing measurement on the sensing target.
  • the signal sending node in the first sensing mode and the first sensing The signal receiving node of the mode is the same node, and the first device is the same as or different from the source node;
  • the first device determines, based on the first measurement report, whether to initiate switching of the sensing mode of the sensing target from the first sensing mode to the second sensing mode, and the signal sending node of the second sensing mode and the The signal receiving nodes in the second sensing mode are different nodes.
  • a sensing mode switching device applied to the first device, and the device includes:
  • Obtaining module configured to obtain a first measurement report.
  • the first measurement report is generated by the source node using a first sensing mode to perform a first sensing measurement on the sensing target.
  • the signal sending node in the first sensing mode and the third sensing mode The signal receiving node in a sensing mode is the same node, and the first device is the same as or different from the source node;
  • a first determination module configured to determine whether to initiate switching of the sensing mode of the sensing target from the first sensing mode to the second sensing mode according to the first measurement report, and the signal sending node of the second sensing mode and the mentioned The signal receiving nodes in the two sensing modes are different nodes.
  • a sensing mode switching method which method includes:
  • the first node When initiating switching of the sensing mode of the sensing target from the first sensing mode to the second sensing mode, the first node receives a first request message sent by the first device, where the first request message is used to request at least one target candidate.
  • the node uses a second sensing mode to perform sensing measurement on the sensing target.
  • the signal sending node of the first sensing mode and the signal receiving node of the first sensing mode are the same node.
  • the signal sending node of the second sensing mode The signal receiving node in the second sensing mode is a different node;
  • the first node sends a feedback message to the first device, where the feedback message is used to indicate whether the target candidate node agrees to use the second sensing mode to perform sensing measurement on the sensing target.
  • a sensing mode switching device applied to the first node, and the device includes:
  • the first receiving module is configured to receive a first request message sent by the first device when the sensing mode of the sensing target is switched from the first sensing mode to the second sensing mode.
  • the first request message is used to request At least one target candidate node uses a second sensing mode to perform sensing measurement on the sensing target.
  • the signal sending node of the first sensing mode and the signal receiving node of the first sensing mode are the same node.
  • the second sensing mode The signal sending node and the signal receiving node of the second sensing mode are different nodes;
  • the first sending module is configured to send a feedback message to the first device, where the feedback message is used to indicate whether the target candidate node agrees to use the second sensing mode to perform sensing measurement on the sensing target.
  • a terminal in a fifth aspect, includes a processor and a memory.
  • the memory stores programs or instructions that can be run on the processor.
  • the program or instructions are executed by the processor, the following implementations are implemented: The steps of the method described in one aspect, or the steps of implementing the method described in the third aspect.
  • a network side device in a sixth aspect, includes a processor and a memory.
  • the memory stores programs or instructions that can be run on the processor.
  • the program or instructions are executed by the processor.
  • a communication device is provided.
  • the communication device is a terminal or a network side device.
  • the communication device includes a processor and a communication interface, wherein the communication interface is used to obtain a first measurement report, and the third measurement report is provided.
  • a measurement report is generated by the source node using the first sensing mode to perform the first sensing measurement on the sensing target, the signal sending node of the first sensing mode and the signal receiving node of the first sensing mode are the same node, and the first sensing mode
  • a device is the same as or different from the source node;
  • the processor is further configured to determine, according to the first measurement report, whether to initiate switching of the sensing mode of the sensing target from the first sensing mode to the second sensing mode. , the signal sending node of the second sensing mode and the signal receiving node of the second sensing mode are different nodes.
  • the signal sending node of the first sensing mode and the signal receiving node of the first sensing mode are the same node, and the first sensing mode
  • the signal sending node in the second sensing mode and the signal receiving node in the second sensing mode are different nodes;
  • the communication interface is also used to send a feedback message to the first device, the feedback message is used to indicate the target candidate Whether the node agrees to use the second sensing mode to perform sensing measurement on the sensing target.
  • a ninth aspect provides a communication system, including: a terminal and a network side device.
  • the terminal can be used to perform the steps of the sensing mode switching method as described in the first aspect, or to perform the sensing mode as described in the third aspect. Steps of the switching method; the network side device may be configured to perform the steps of the sensing mode switching method as described in the first aspect, or to perform the steps of the sensing mode switching method as described in the third aspect.
  • a readable storage medium is provided. Programs or instructions are stored on the readable storage medium. When the programs or instructions are executed by a processor, the steps of the method described in the first aspect are implemented, or the steps of the method are implemented as described in the first aspect. The steps of the method described in the third aspect.
  • a chip in an eleventh aspect, includes a processor and a communication interface.
  • the communication interface is coupled to the processor.
  • the processor is used to run programs or instructions to implement the method described in the first aspect. The steps of a method, or steps of implementing a method as described in the third aspect.
  • a computer program/program product is provided, the computer program/program product is stored in a storage medium, and the computer program/program product is executed by at least one processor to implement as described in the first aspect
  • the sensing node uses the first sensing mode to perform sensing measurement on the sensing target, it is determined according to the measurement report of the sensing node whether to initiate switching of the sensing mode for the sensing target from the first sensing mode to the second sensing mode. way of perception. Since the sensing mode used in the perceptual measurement can be switched, the perceptual measurement can be performed in an appropriate perceptual mode, thereby improving the reliability of the perceptual measurement.
  • Figure 1 is a schematic diagram of the network structure applicable to the embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 2 is one of the flow charts of a sensing mode switching processing method provided by an embodiment of the present application
  • Figure 2a is a schematic diagram of switching the first sensing mode to the second sensing mode
  • Figure 2b is a schematic diagram of switching the second sensing mode to the first sensing mode
  • Figure 2c is a schematic diagram of multiple combinations of switching the first sensing mode to the second sensing mode
  • Figure 3 is one of the structural diagrams of a sensing mode switching processing device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 4 is the second flow chart of a sensing mode switching processing method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 5 is the second structural diagram of a sensing mode switching processing device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 6 is a structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 7 is a structural diagram of a terminal provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 8 is a structural diagram of a network side device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 9 is a structural diagram of another network-side device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • first, second, etc. in the description and claims of this application are used to distinguish similar objects and are not used to describe a specific order or sequence. It is to be understood that the terms so used are interchangeable under appropriate circumstances so that the embodiments of the present application can be practiced in sequences other than those illustrated or described herein, and that "first" and “second” are distinguished objects It is usually one type, and the number of objects is not limited.
  • the first object can be one or multiple.
  • “and/or” in the description and claims indicates at least one of the connected objects, and the character “/" generally indicates that the related objects are in an "or” relationship.
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • LTE-Advanced, LTE-A Long Term Evolution
  • LTE-A Long Term Evolution
  • CDMA Code Division Multiple Access
  • TDMA Time Division Multiple Access
  • FDMA Frequency Division Multiple Access
  • OFDMA Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access
  • SC-FDMA Single-carrier Frequency Division Multiple Access
  • NR New Radio
  • FIG. 1 shows a block diagram of a wireless communication system to which embodiments of the present application are applicable.
  • the wireless communication system includes a terminal 11 and a network side device 12.
  • the terminal 11 may be a mobile phone, a tablet computer (Tablet Personal Computer), a laptop computer (Laptop Computer), or a notebook computer, a personal digital assistant (Personal Digital Assistant, PDA), a palmtop computer, a netbook, or a super mobile personal computer.
  • Tablet Personal Computer Tablet Personal Computer
  • laptop computer laptop computer
  • PDA Personal Digital Assistant
  • PDA Personal Digital Assistant
  • UMPC ultra-mobile personal computer
  • UMPC mobile Internet device
  • MID mobile Internet Device
  • AR augmented reality
  • VR virtual reality
  • robots wearable devices
  • WUE Vehicle User Equipment
  • PUE Pedestrian User Equipment
  • smart home home equipment with wireless communication functions, such as refrigerators, TVs, washing machines or furniture, etc.
  • game consoles personal computers (personal computer, PC), teller machine or self-service machine and other terminal-side devices.
  • Wearable devices include: smart watches, smart bracelets, smart headphones, smart glasses, smart jewelry (smart bracelets, smart bracelets, smart rings, smart necklaces, smart anklets) bracelets, smart anklets, etc.), smart wristbands, smart clothing, etc.
  • the network side device 12 may include an access network device or a core network node, where the access network device may also be called a radio access network device, a radio access network (Radio Access Network, RAN), a radio access network function or a wireless access network unit.
  • RAN Radio Access Network
  • Access network equipment may include base stations, Wireless Local Area Networks, WLAN) access point or WiFi node, etc.
  • the base station may be called Node B, Evolved Node B (eNB), access point, Base Transceiver Station (BTS), radio base station, radio transceiver, Basic Service Set (BSS), Extended Service Set (ESS), home B-node, home evolved B-node, transmission and reception point (Transmission Reception Point, TRP) or somewhere else in the field
  • BSS Basic Service Set
  • ESS Extended Service Set
  • TRP Transmission Reception Point
  • the base station is not limited to specific technical terms. It should be noted that in the embodiment of this application, only the base station in the NR system is used as an example for introduction, and the specific type of the base station is not limited. .
  • the core network node may include but is not limited to at least one of the following: core network node, core network function, mobility management entity (Mobility Management Entity, MME), access mobility management function (Access and Mobility Management Function, AMF), session management function (Session Management Function, SMF), User Plane Function (UPF), Policy Control Function (PCF), Policy and Charging Rules Function (PCRF), Edge Application Service Discovery function (Edge Application Server Discovery Function, EASDF), Unified Data Management (UDM), Unified Data Repository (UDR), Home Subscriber Server (HSS), centralized network configuration ( Centralized network configuration (CNC), Network Repository Function (NRF), Network Exposure Function (NEF), Local NEF (Local NEF, or L-NEF), Binding Support Function (Binding Support Function, BSF), application function (Application Function, AF), etc.
  • MME mobility management entity
  • AMF Access and Mobility Management Function
  • SMF Session Management Function
  • UPF User Plane Function
  • PCF Policy Control Function
  • This application involves Integrated Sensing and Communication (ISAC) (referred to as “Synesthesia Integration”) technology.
  • Synesthesia Integration Integrated Sensing and Communication
  • Wireless communications and radar sensing have been developing in parallel, but the intersection is limited. They have many commonalities in signal processing algorithms, equipment, and to a certain extent system architecture. In recent years, the coexistence, cooperation, and joint design of these two systems have attracted increasing attention from researchers.
  • Radar systems often use specially designed waveforms, such as short pulses and chirps, that enable high-power radiation and simplified receiver processing.
  • waveforms are not necessary for radar detection, a good example is passive radar or passive sensing that uses different radio signals as sensing signals.
  • Wireless sensing can broadly refer to retrieving information from received radio signals, rather than modulating communication data into a signal at a transmitter.
  • common signal processing methods can be used to analyze the dynamics of target signal reflection delay, angle of arrival (Angle of Arrival, AOA), angle of departure (Angle of Departure, AOD), and Doppler. Parameters are estimated; for sensing the physical characteristics of the target, it can be achieved by measuring equipment, objects or inherent mode signals. The two sensing methods can be called sensing parameter estimation and pattern recognition respectively.
  • wireless sensing refers to more general sensing technologies and applications that use radio signals.
  • Synesthesia integration technology is a technology that integrates wireless sensing functions into mobile communication networks.
  • Mobile communication networks that integrate wireless sensing functions can be called Perceptive Mobile Networks (PMNs).
  • PMN can evolve from the current 5th Generation (5G) mobile network and is expected to become a ubiquitous wireless sensor network while providing stable and high-quality mobile communication services. It can be built on existing mobile network infrastructure without requiring major changes to network structures and equipment. It will unleash the maximum capabilities of mobile networks and avoid the high infrastructure costs of building new wide-area wireless sensor networks separately. As coverage expands, integrated communication and sensing capabilities are expected to enable many new applications.
  • Sensing mobile networks are capable of providing both communication and wireless sensing services, and have the potential to become a ubiquitous wireless sensing solution due to their large broadband coverage and strong infrastructure.
  • Sensitive mobile networks can be widely used in communication and sensing in the fields of transportation, communications, energy, precision agriculture, and security, where existing solutions are either unfeasible or inefficient. It can also provide complementary sensing capabilities to existing sensor networks, with unique day and night operation capabilities and the ability to penetrate fog, foliage and even solid objects.
  • a base station including one or more transmission reception points (Transmission Reception Point, TRP) on the base station) or user equipment (User Equipment, UE, also known as "terminal") (including one or more terminals on the terminal)
  • TRP Transmission Reception Point
  • UE User Equipment
  • Subarray/Panel can be used as a sensing node participating in sensing or synaesthesia integration services.
  • the sensing node can sense the sensing target (or sense measurement).
  • the sensing target can be either a specific area or a specific entity target.
  • the sensing signal can be a signal that does not contain transmission information, such as LTE/NR synchronization and reference signals, including synchronization signals and physical broadcast channel (Synchronization Signal and PBCH block, SSB) signals, channel state information reference signals (Channel State Information Reference Signal, CSI-RS), Demodulation Reference Signal (DMRS), Channel Sounding Reference Signal SRS, Positioning Reference Signal (PRS), Phase-tracking reference signal (PTRS), etc., also It can be single-frequency continuous wave (CW), frequency modulated continuous wave (Frequency Modulated CW, FMCW) commonly used in radar, and ultra-wideband Gaussian pulse, etc.; it can also be a newly designed special sensing signal, for example, with good correlation characteristics and low Peak to Average Power Ratio (PAPR), or the newly designed synaesthesia integrated signal, which inherits both It can carry
  • Perception methods can include the following two types: First, the perception method of spontaneous self-collection. In this sensing method, the sending node of the sensing signal (i.e., the signal sending node) and the receiving node of the sensing signal (i.e., the signal receiving node) are the same sensing node, and the sensing node performs sensing by receiving the echo of the signal sent by itself. Second, the way A sends and B receives. In this sensing method, the sending node of the sensing signal and the receiving node of the sensing signal are different sensing nodes.
  • the sensing mode of spontaneous and self-receiving is collectively called the first sensing mode
  • the sensing mode of A sending and B receiving is collectively called the second sensing mode.
  • the sensing node using the first sensing method to perform sensing measurement on the sensing target can be called the sensing node performing the first sensing on the sensing target
  • the sensing node using the second sensing method to perform sensing measurement on the sensing target can be called the sensing node sensing the sensing target.
  • the target gains second perception.
  • sensing nodes usually use some predetermined or preconfigured sensing method to perform sensing measurements on sensing targets.
  • the sensing nodes use the first sensing method to perform sensing measurements on the sensing targets, or the sensing nodes use the second sensing method to sense and measure the sensing targets.
  • Targets perform perceptual measurements.
  • the sensing node may not be able to perform accurate sensing measurements of the sensing target, which will result in Perceptual measures have poor reliability.
  • embodiments of the present application provide a sensing mode switching method, a sensing mode switching device, a first device, a first node, and a storage medium to solve the problem of poor reliability of sensing measurement.
  • sensing mode switching method sensing mode switching device, first device, first node and storage medium provided by the embodiments of the present application will be described in detail below with reference to the accompanying drawings through some embodiments and application scenarios.
  • FIG. 2 shows a flow chart of a sensing mode switching method provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 2, the sensing mode switching method includes the following steps:
  • Step 201 The first device obtains a first measurement report.
  • the first measurement report is generated by the source node using a first sensing mode to perform a first sensing measurement on the sensing target.
  • the signal sending node in the first sensing mode and the The signal receiving node in the first sensing mode is the same node, and the first device is the same as or different from the source node;
  • Step 202 The first device determines, based on the first measurement report, whether to initiate switching of the sensing mode for the sensing target from the first sensing mode to the second sensing mode.
  • the signal sending node of the second sensing mode and The signal receiving nodes in the second sensing mode are different nodes.
  • the embodiment of the present application involves switching the sensing mode of the sensing target from the first sensing mode to the second sensing mode.
  • the sensing node that performs the first sensing of the sensing target before the switching can be called a source node, and the first device can be the source node. , it can also be other nodes. That is to say, the source node can autonomously determine whether to initiate a sensing mode handover based on the first measurement report (the measurement report may be called a "handover measurement report"), or the access node or core network node of the source node can determine whether to initiate a switching in the sensing mode based on the source node's
  • the first measurement report of the source node is used to determine whether to initiate the switching of the sensing mode.
  • the access node or the core network node of the source node receives the first measurement report sent by the source node, and determines whether to initiate the switching of the sensing mode based on the first measurement report. switch.
  • the sensing target can be either a specific area or a specific physical target.
  • the first sensing measurement in the embodiment of the present application can be understood as the "handover measurement” performed by the source node in order to obtain the first measurement report.
  • the number of source nodes that perform the first perception of the sensing target may be one or more, and each source node performs the first sensing of the sensing target respectively.
  • the initiated switch may be to initiate a switch from a certain source node to perform first sensing of the sensing target to one or more pairs of sensing nodes to perform second sensing of the sensing target.
  • the first device determines whether to initiate switching of the sensing mode for the sensing target from the first sensing mode to the third sensing mode based on the first measurement report.
  • Two modes of perception Based on the first measurement report, the first device can reasonably determine whether it is necessary to initiate switching of the sensing mode of the sensing target from the first sensing mode to the second sensing mode, and can prevent the source node from still performing the sensing target according to the inherent first sensing mode. Invalid perceptual measurement. Since the sensing mode used in the perceptual measurement can be switched, the perceptual measurement can be performed in an appropriate perceptual mode, thereby improving the reliability of the perceptual measurement.
  • the first device includes any of the following:
  • the source node is a first network-side device
  • the first device includes a core network node or the first network-side device
  • the first device When the source node is a first terminal, the first device includes a core network node, the first terminal, or a second network side device accessed by the first terminal.
  • the above-mentioned core network node may be, for example, a sensing function network element (Sensing Function, SF), AMF or core-aware application server.
  • SF sensing function network element
  • AMF Access Management Function
  • the first measurement report includes at least one of the following:
  • First indication information used to indicate whether a preset event occurs.
  • the preset event is used to trigger the switching of the sensing mode of the sensing target from the first sensing mode to the second sensing mode;
  • the second indication information is used to indicate whether the preset switching condition is satisfied.
  • the preset switching condition is used to trigger the switching of the sensing mode of the sensing target from the first sensing mode to the second sensing mode.
  • the first measurement report at least includes a measurement value (or measurement result) of a perception measurement quantity required for handover measurement
  • the perception measurement quantity required for handover measurement may include a perception measurement quantity of the current perception service.
  • the first-level measurement quantity can include the received signal/channel response complex results, amplitude/phase, I path/Q path and its operation results (operations can include addition, subtraction, multiplication and division, matrix addition Subtraction and multiplication, matrix transposition, trigonometric relation operations, square root operations and power operations, etc., as well as threshold detection results, maximum/minimum value extraction results of the above operation results, etc.; operations can also include Fast Fourier Transform (Fast Fourier Transform, FFT)/fast Inverse Fast Fourier Transform (IFFT), Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT)/Inverse Discrete Fourier Transform (IDFT), Two-dimensional Fast Fourier Transform ( 2D-FFT), three-dimensional fast Fourier transform (3D-FFT), matched filtering, autocorrelation operation, wavelet transform and digital filtering, etc., as well as threshold detection results, maximum/minimum value extraction results of the above operation results, etc.);
  • FFT Fast Fourier Transform
  • IFFT Fast Inverse Fast Fourier
  • the second-level measurement quantity (also called the basic measurement quantity) can include, for example, delay, Doppler, angle, intensity and their multi-dimensional combination representation;
  • the third level measurement quantity (also called basic attribute/state) may include, for example, at least one of distance, speed, orientation, spatial position and acceleration;
  • the fourth level measurement quantity (also known as advanced attributes/status), for example, can include the presence of the perceived target, the trajectory of the perceived target, movements, expressions, vital signs, quantity, imaging results, weather, air quality, shape, material and composition at least one of them.
  • the sensing measurement volume also includes corresponding label information, which may include at least one of the following: sensing signal identification information, sensing measurement configuration identification information, sensing service information (for example, sensing service ID), data subscription ID, measurement volume Purpose (for example, communication, perception, synaesthesia), time information, perception node information (for example, node ID, node location, device orientation), perception link information (for example, perception link sequence number, sending and receiving node identification), perception measurement quantity Description information (form, such as amplitude value, phase value, complex value combining amplitude and phase; resource type, such as time domain measurement results, frequency domain resource measurement results), measurement quantity indicator information (such as Signal Noise Ratio, SNR), perceived SNR).
  • label information may include at least one of the following: sensing signal identification information, sensing measurement configuration identification information, sensing service information (for example, sensing service ID), data subscription ID, measurement volume Purpose (for example, communication, perception, synaesthesia), time information, perception node information (for example, node ID, node location, device
  • Perceptual SNR represents the ratio of the perceived signal energy reflected by the sensing target or sensing area to the noise signal energy in the environment and equipment;
  • SINR Perceived Signal to Interference plus Noise Ratio
  • Perceptual reproducibility evaluation indicators such as the sum of the Euclidean distance (Euclidean Distance) between the two sequence sample points, or the regular path distance in dynamic time planning (Dynamic Time Warping, DTW), or other similarities that can reflect the two sequences Among them, other indicators that can reflect the similarity of two sequences include but are not limited to: Longest Common Subsequence (LCSS), Edit Distance on Real Sequences (EDR), Real Sequences Edit Distance with Real Penalty (ERP), Hausdorff Distance (Hausdorff Distance), Fréchet Distance (Fréchet Distance), One Way Distance (OWD) and Multi-line Location Distance (Locality In -between Polylines, LIP), etc.
  • LCSS Longest Common Subsequence
  • EDR Edit Distance on Real Sequences
  • ERP Real Penalty
  • Hausdorff Distance Hausdorff Distance
  • Fréchet Distance Fréchet Distance
  • OWD Multi-line Location Distance
  • Multi-line Location Distance Licality In
  • the first device is different from the source node
  • the method further includes:
  • the first device sends a first measurement request to the source node, where the first measurement request is used to request the source node to use the first sensing method to perform the first sensing measurement on the sensing target;
  • the first device obtains a first measurement report, including:
  • the first device receives a first measurement report sent by the source node, the first measurement report being generated by the source node based on the first sensing measurement.
  • the state of the sensing target changes
  • the sensing resources available to the source node change
  • the measured value of the sensing measurement quantity of the source node reaches the first preset threshold
  • the measured value of the communication measurement quantity of the source node reaches the second preset threshold.
  • the change in the state of the perceived target may include, for example, at least one of the following: a change in the position of the perceived target, or a change in the speed of the perceived target.
  • a change in the environment of the sensing area where the sensing target is located may be, for example, an obstruction in the sensing area.
  • a change in the sensing resources available to the source node may be, for example, that the source node bursts into other high-priority sensing services, communication services or synaesthesia integration services.
  • the first device can evaluate whether it is necessary to initiate a switching of the sensing mode based on the remaining available sensing resources of the source node. If it is determined that a switching of the sensing mode needs to be initiated, the first device sends a third message to the source node based on such a target event. A measurement request.
  • the above-mentioned first preset threshold can be understood to include switching thresholds corresponding to different sensing measurement quantities.
  • the measured value of the source node's sensory measurement quantity reaches the first preset threshold, it can be understood as the perceived signal received power, perceived SNR, perceived signal-to-interference plus Noise Ratio (SINR), distance measurement value, speed measurement value and At least one of the angle measurement values satisfies the corresponding switching threshold.
  • the above communication measurement quantity may include at least one of the following: Reference Signal Received Power (RSRP), SNR, SINR, Reference Signal Received Quality (RSRQ), Received Signal Strength Indicator (Received Signal Strength) Indicator, RSSI), bit error rate, block error rate, throughput and spectrum efficiency, etc.
  • RSRP Reference Signal Received Power
  • SINR Reference Signal Received Power
  • RSRQ Reference Signal Received Quality
  • RSSI Received Signal Strength Indicator
  • bit error rate bit error rate
  • block error rate throughput and spectrum efficiency, etc.
  • the method before the first device obtains the first measurement report, the method further includes:
  • the first device sends first measurement configuration information to the source node, where the first measurement configuration information is used by the source node to perform the first sensing measurement.
  • the first measurement configuration information may also be called handover measurement configuration information.
  • the first measurement configuration information may include at least one of the following:
  • Measurement object indication information used to indicate one or more first signals that need to be measured.
  • the first signals can be associated with at least one of the sensing measurement quantity and sensing parameter configuration information;
  • Configuration information of the target event used to trigger execution of the first sensing measurement
  • the first device may first send a first measurement request to the source node. After the first device receives the response from the source node, the first device then sends a first measurement request to the source node. The node sends first measurement configuration information.
  • the first measurement configuration information is included in the first measurement request.
  • the first device can send the first measurement request to the source node, and include the first measurement configuration information in the first measurement request, thereby, Signaling and resource waste can be moderately reduced.
  • the first device is the same as the source node
  • the method further includes:
  • the first device sends the first measurement report to a second device, where the second device includes a core network node or a network side device accessed by the source node.
  • the first device may also connect to the core network node or the source node.
  • the incoming network side device sends the first measurement report.
  • the source node may send the first measurement report to the core network node; when the source node is a terminal, the source node may send a first measurement report to the core network node or the network side to which the source node is connected.
  • the device sends a first measurement report.
  • the first device is the same as the source node
  • the first device obtains a first measurement report, including:
  • the first device determines that the target event occurs, obtain the first measurement report
  • the target event includes at least one of the following:
  • the state of the sensing target changes
  • the position of the source node changes
  • the environment of the sensing area where the sensing target is located changes
  • the sensing resources available to the source node change
  • the measured value of the sensing measurement quantity of the source node reaches the third preset threshold
  • the measured value of the communication measurement quantity of the source node reaches a fourth preset threshold.
  • the source node can autonomously perform the first sensing measurement and obtain the first measurement report when it is determined that the target event occurs.
  • the target event in this implementation please refer to the relevant description of the target event mentioned above. To avoid To avoid repetition, I won’t elaborate on this.
  • the method further includes:
  • the first device When the first device determines to initiate switching of the sensing mode for the sensing target from the first sensing mode to the second sensing mode, the first device sends a first message to the N first candidate nodes.
  • Request message the first request message is used to request at least one target candidate node to use the second sensing method to perform sensing measurements on the sensing target, and N is an integer greater than or equal to 1;
  • the first device receives a feedback message sent by at least one first candidate node among the N first candidate nodes, where the feedback message is used to indicate whether the target candidate node agrees to use the second sensing mode to Perform perceptual measurements on the perceptual targets described above.
  • the above feedback message can be understood as a response message to the first request message, which is sent by the first candidate node to the first device.
  • the feedback message may be called a response message; when the feedback message indicates that the target candidate node does not agree to use the second sensing method to sense the sensing target In the case of measurement, the feedback message may be called a rejection message.
  • the first candidate node can be either a network side device or a terminal.
  • the first candidate node may be understood as a node that may perform sensing measurement on the sensing target according to the second sensing mode, or an access node of a node that may perform sensing measurement on the sensing target according to the second sensing mode.
  • the N first candidate nodes may include the source node, or may not include the source node. When the first device is different from the source node, the N first candidate nodes may include the source node.
  • the target candidate node can be understood as a node that may perform perceptual measurement on the perceptual target according to the second perceptual mode.
  • the target candidate node may be understood as the first candidate node.
  • the first request message may be understood as being used to request at least one The first candidate node uses the second sensing mode to perform sensing measurement on the sensing target.
  • the target candidate node may be understood as the node selected by the first candidate node that may perform sensing measurement on the sensing target according to the second sensing method. Node where sensory measurements are made.
  • the first device determines to initiate switching of the sensing mode of the sensing target from the first sensing mode to the second sensing mode performed by the terminal, then the first device can directly send the first request message to N candidate terminals, To request at least one candidate terminal to use the second sensing mode to perform sensing measurements on the sensing target, the first device may also send a first request message to the N candidate network side devices to request at least one candidate terminal to use the second sensing mode.
  • the second sensing mode performs sensing measurement on the sensing target.
  • the first device can directly send messages to N candidate network side devices.
  • a first request message is sent to request at least one candidate network side device to perform sensing measurement on the sensing target in a second sensing manner.
  • the first device determines to initiate switching of the sensing mode of the sensing target from the first sensing mode to the second sensing mode, determine the interaction type of the second sensing mode
  • the first device sends a first request message to the N first candidate nodes, including:
  • the first device sends a first request message to the N first candidate nodes according to the interaction type of the second sensing mode
  • interaction type of the second perception mode includes any of the following:
  • the signal sending node and the signal receiving node in the second sensing mode are two different network side devices, that is, one of the signal sending node and the signal receiving node is a network side device, and the other is a network side device. Another network side device;
  • one of the signal sending node and the signal receiving node in the second sensing mode is a network side device, and the other is a terminal;
  • the signal sending node and the signal receiving node in the second sensing mode are two different terminals, that is, one of the signal sending node and the signal receiving node is a terminal, and the other is another terminal.
  • the receiving node and the sending node of the sensing signal are different in the second sensing mode, this involves many different combinations of the receiving node and the sending node of the sensing signal.
  • the receiving node and the sending node of the sensing signal are The combination type can be understood as the interaction type of the second perception mode.
  • the first device may determine the interaction type of the second sensing mode, and determine the interaction type of the second sensing mode according to the Interaction type, sending the first request message to the N first candidate nodes.
  • the first device may send the first request information to N candidate network side devices instead of sending the first request information to N candidate terminals.
  • the first request message may include indication information of the interaction type of the second sensing mode, which is used to indicate that second sensing of a certain interaction type is performed after the switching of the sensing mode is completed.
  • the first request message includes indication information of the first interaction type, which is used to instruct second sensing between the network side device and the network side device after the sensing mode switching is completed.
  • the first request message includes at least one of the following:
  • Instruction information of perception requirements used to indicate, for example, the area of the perception target, the object type of the perception target, the perception function required for the perception target, the purpose of perception, the result of perception, etc.;
  • Perceived quality of service Quality of Service (Quality of Service, QoS) indication information, used to indicate at least one of the following information: Perceptual resolution (further divided into: ranging resolution, angle measurement resolution, speed measurement resolution and imaging resolution etc.), perception accuracy (which can be further divided into: ranging accuracy, angle measurement accuracy, speed measurement accuracy and positioning accuracy, etc.), perception range (which can be further divided into: distance measurement range, speed measurement range, angle measurement range, imaging range, etc.) , Perception delay (such as the time interval from the sensing signal being sent to obtaining the sensing result, or the time interval from the initiation of sensing demand to obtaining the sensing result), sensing update rate (such as the time between performing sensing twice and obtaining the sensing result) interval), detection probability (such as the probability of being correctly detected when the sensing object exists), false alarm probability (such as the probability of incorrectly detecting the sensing target when the sensing object does not exist), perceived security and perceived privacy sex;
  • Perceptual resolution further divided into:
  • Indication information of perceptual measurement results used to indicate that the measurement value based on at least one perceptual measurement quantity is obtained directly or indirectly. perceived results;
  • sensing conditions used to indicate at least one of sensing start time, sensing end time, and sensing duration
  • the prior information of the sensing target or sensing area is used to indicate at least one of the type of sensing target, the approximate location or area of the sensing target, and the historical status of the sensing target (such as speed, angle, distance, acceleration, spatial orientation, etc.);
  • the indication information of the judgment condition for successful sensing mode switching is used to indicate the measurement value of at least one sensing measurement quantity and/or the measurement result of the communication measurement quantity reaches a preset threshold within a preset time or a preset number of times.
  • the first device determines the N first candidate nodes according to at least one of the following:
  • the first device may determine the candidate terminal according to at least one of the following:
  • Antenna panel orientation information of the candidate terminal
  • the status information of the candidate terminal may, for example, include information such as moving speed, moving direction, time period of remaining stationary/moving, etc.;
  • the sensing capability information of the candidate terminal may include, for example, the sensing coverage of the terminal, the maximum bandwidth available for sensing, the maximum duration of the sensing service, the sensing signal type and frame format that can be supported, and the terminal’s antenna array information (such as array type). , number of antennas, array aperture, antenna polarization characteristics, array element gain and directivity characteristics, etc.);
  • the resource information that the candidate terminal can currently use for sensing may include, for example, time resources (number of symbols, number of time slots, number of frames, etc.), frequency resources (such as the number of resource blocks (RB), resource units (Resource Element, RE) ), total bandwidth, available frequency band locations, etc.), antenna resources (such as the number of antenna arrays/number of antenna sub-arrays), phase modulation resources (such as the number of hardware phase shifters) and orthogonal code resources (such as the length and number of orthogonal codes );
  • the channel state information of the candidate terminal may, for example, include the channel transfer function/channel impulse response of at least one communication link, channel quality indicator (Channel Quality Indicator, CQI), precoding matrix indicator (Precoding Matrix Indicator, PMI), CSI- At least one of RS resource indication, SSB resource indication, layer indicator (Layer Indicator, LI), rank indicator (Rank indicator, RI) and layer 1 reference signal received power (L1-Reference Signal Received Power, L1-RSRP).
  • channel quality indicator Channel Quality Indicator, CQI
  • Precoding Matrix Indicator, PMI Precoding Matrix Indicator
  • CSI- At least one of RS resource indication SSB resource indication, layer indicator (Layer Indicator, LI), rank indicator (Rank indicator, RI) and layer 1 reference signal received power (L1-Reference Signal Received Power, L1-RSRP).
  • the first device may determine the candidate network side device according to at least one of the following:
  • Antenna panel orientation information of the candidate network side device
  • the sensing capability information of the candidate network-side device may include, for example, the sensing coverage range of the network-side device, the maximum bandwidth available for sensing, the maximum duration of the sensing service, the supported sensing signal type and frame format, and the antenna of the network-side device.
  • Array information (such as array type, number of antennas, array aperture, antenna polarization characteristics, array element gain and directivity characteristics, etc.);
  • the resource information that the candidate network side device can currently use for sensing may include, for example, time resources (number of symbols, number of slots, number of frames, etc.), frequency resources (such as number of RBs, number of REs, total bandwidth, available frequency band locations, etc.), At least one of antenna resources (such as the number of antenna arrays/number of antenna sub-arrays), phase modulation resources (such as the number of hardware phase shifters) and orthogonal code resources (such as the length and number of orthogonal codes);
  • the channel state information of the candidate network side device may, for example, include the channel transfer function/channel impulse response of at least one communication link, CQI, PMI, CSI-RS resource indication, SSB resource indication, LI, RI and L1-RSRP. At least one item.
  • the feedback message includes at least one of the following:
  • a first feedback message determined by the first candidate node according to the first request message, is used to indicate whether the first candidate node agrees to use the second sensing method to perform sensing measurement on the sensing target, the
  • the target candidate node includes the first candidate node;
  • the second feedback message is determined by the second candidate node according to the second request message sent by the first candidate node, and is used to indicate whether the second candidate node agrees to use the second sensing method to sense the sensing target.
  • the second request message is used to request the second candidate node to use the second sensing mode to perform sensing measurement on the sensing target, and the target candidate node includes the second candidate node.
  • the first feedback message can be understood as being directly determined by the first candidate node based on the first request message and used to indicate whether the first candidate node agrees to use the second sensing method to perform sensing measurement on the sensing target.
  • the first feedback message is determined by the first candidate node.
  • the node feeds back to the first device.
  • the second feedback message can be understood as being determined by the second candidate node based on the second request message and used to indicate whether the second candidate node agrees to use the second sensing method to perform sensing measurement on the sensing target.
  • the second feedback message is determined by the first candidate node. Feedback to the first device.
  • the second candidate node may be a node associated with the first candidate node and jointly use the second sensing method to perform sensing measurements on the sensing target with the first candidate node, or may be selected by the first candidate node for using the second sensing method.
  • the second sensing mode is a node that performs sensing measurement on the sensing target. For ease of understanding, examples are provided below:
  • Example 1 The first device sends a first request message to the first candidate network-side device (i.e., the first candidate node, which is also the target candidate node) to request network-side device-to-network-side device communication after the sensing mode switching is completed. Second perception.
  • the first candidate network side device sends a first feedback message to the first device based on the first request message to indicate whether it agrees to use the second sensing mode to perform sensing measurement on the sensing target.
  • Example 2 The first device sends a first request message to the first candidate network-side device (i.e., the first candidate node, which is also the target candidate node) to request network-side device-to-network-side device communication after the sensing mode switching is completed. Second perception.
  • the first candidate network side device sends a first feedback message to the first device based on the first request message to indicate its Do you agree to use the second perception method to measure the perception target?
  • the first candidate network side device sends a second request message to the second candidate network side device (i.e., the second candidate node, which is also the target candidate node), for requesting the second candidate network side device to use the second sensing method to sense Targets perform perceptual measurements.
  • the second candidate network side device sends a feedback message to the first candidate network side device based on the second request message to indicate whether it agrees to use the second sensing method to perform sensing measurement on the sensing target.
  • the first candidate network side device based on the second candidate The feedback message fed back by the network side device sends a second feedback message to the first device, used to indicate whether the second candidate network side device agrees to use the second sensing method to perform sensing measurement on the sensing target.
  • Example 3 When the first device determines to initiate switching of the sensing mode of the sensing target from the first sensing mode to the second sensing mode, the first device sends a first message to the first candidate network side device (i.e., the first candidate node).
  • the request message is used to request terminal-to-terminal second sensing after the sensing mode switching is completed.
  • the first candidate network side device Based on the first request message, the first candidate network side device sends a second request message to the first candidate terminal and the second candidate terminal (ie, the second candidate node, which is also the target candidate node), for requesting the first candidate terminal and the second candidate terminal.
  • the second candidate terminal uses the second sensing method to perform sensing measurement on the sensing target, and the candidate terminal sends a feedback message to the first candidate network side device based on the second request message to indicate whether it agrees to use the second sensing method to perform sensing measurement on the sensing target.
  • the first candidate network side device sends a second feedback message to the first device based on the feedback message fed back by the candidate terminal, used to indicate whether the candidate terminal agrees to use the second sensing method to perform sensing measurement on the sensing target.
  • Example 4 When the first device determines to initiate switching of the sensing mode of the sensing target from the first sensing mode to the second sensing mode, the first device sends a signal to the first candidate network side device (i.e., the first candidate node, which is also the target). The candidate node) sends a first request message for requesting the first candidate network side device to perform second sensing of the network side device-terminal after the sensing mode switching is completed.
  • the first candidate network side device i.e., the first candidate node, which is also the target.
  • the candidate node sends a first request message for requesting the first candidate network side device to perform second sensing of the network side device-terminal after the sensing mode switching is completed.
  • the first candidate network side device Based on the first request message, the first candidate network side device sends a second request message to the first candidate terminal (i.e., the second candidate node, which is also the target candidate node), for requesting the first candidate terminal to use the second sensing method to sense The target performs sensing measurement.
  • the first candidate terminal sends a feedback message to the first candidate network side device based on the second request message to indicate whether it agrees to use the second sensing method to perform sensing measurement on the sensing target.
  • the first candidate network side device performs sensing measurement based on the second request message.
  • the feedback message fed back by the first candidate terminal sends a second feedback message to the first device, used to indicate whether the first candidate terminal agrees to use the second sensing method to perform sensing measurement on the sensing target.
  • the feedback message when the feedback message is used to indicate that the target candidate node agrees to use the second sensing method to perform sensing measurements on the sensing target, the feedback message also includes first parameter configuration information.
  • the first parameter configuration information is used to indicate the sensing parameter configuration information that the target candidate node performs sensing measurement on the sensing target.
  • the first parameter configuration information can be understood as the sensing parameter configuration information recommended by the target candidate node.
  • the first parameter configuration information can be used to configure at least one of the following:
  • Waveform type such as Orthogonal frequency division multiplex (OFDM), Single Carrier Frequency Division Multiple Access (SC-FDMA), Orthogonal Time Frequency (Orthogonal Time Frequency) Space, OTFS), frequency modulated continuous wave (Frequency Modulated Continuous Wave, FMCW) and at least one of pulse signals;
  • OFDM Orthogonal frequency division multiplex
  • SC-FDMA Single Carrier Frequency Division Multiple Access
  • OTFS Orthogonal Time Frequency
  • FMCW Frequency Modulated Continuous Wave
  • Subcarrier spacing such as the subcarrier spacing of OFDM system, such as 30KHz;
  • Guard interval such as the time interval from the time when the signal ends sending to the time when the latest echo signal of the signal is received
  • this parameter is proportional to the maximum sensing distance, for example, it can be calculated by 2d max /c, where, d max Indicates the maximum sensing distance (belonging to sensing requirements).
  • d max represents the maximum distance from the sensing signal transceiver point to the signal transmitting point.
  • the OFDM signal cyclic prefix (CP) can Used to indicate the minimum guard interval;
  • this parameter is inversely proportional to the distance resolution and can be obtained by c/(2 ⁇ d), where ⁇ d represents the distance resolution (belonging to the perception requirements) and c represents the speed of light;
  • Burst duration This parameter is inversely proportional to the rate resolution (belongs to the sensing requirements). This parameter is the time span of the sensing signal. It is mainly used to calculate the Doppler frequency offset. This parameter can be passed c/(2f c ⁇ v) Calculated, where ⁇ v represents the speed resolution, f c represents the carrier frequency of the sensing signal;
  • Time domain interval This parameter can be calculated by c/(2f c v range ), where v range represents the maximum rate minus the minimum speed (belonging to the sensing requirements). This parameter is the time between two adjacent sensing signals. interval;
  • Transmit signal power for example, take a value every 2dBm from -20dBm to 23dBm;
  • Signal format such as SRS, DMRS, PRS, etc., or other predefined signals, as well as related sequence format and other information;
  • Signal direction such as the direction of the perceived signal or beam information
  • Time resources such as the time slot index where the sensing signal is located or the symbol index of the time slot.
  • Time resources are divided into two types. One is a one-time time resource, such as one symbol transmitting an omnidirectional sensing signal; the other is a non- One-time time resources, such as multiple groups of periodic time resources or discontinuous time resources (can include start time and end time). Each group of periodic time resources sends sensing signals in the same direction. Different groups of periodic time resources The beam directions on time resources are different;
  • Frequency resources include the center frequency point, bandwidth, RB or subcarrier of the sensing signal, reference point A (Point A), starting bandwidth position, etc.;
  • the sensing signal includes multiple resources, each resource is associated with an SSB QCL, and the QCL includes Type A (Type A), Type B, Type C, or Type D;
  • the above antenna configuration information may include at least one of the following:
  • Antenna element ID or antenna port ID used to send and/or receive sensing signals
  • Panel ID and array element ID used to send and/or receive sensing signals
  • the position information of the antenna element used to send and/or receive sensing signals relative to a local reference point on the antenna array can be represented by Cartesian coordinates (x, y, z) or spherical coordinates);
  • the position information of the panel used to send and/or receive sensing signals relative to a local reference point on the antenna array can be represented by Cartesian coordinates (x, y, z) or spherical coordinates), as well as the user information within these selected panels. to send sensory signals
  • the position information of the antenna array element relative to a unified reference point on the panel (such as the center point of the panel) (can be represented by Cartesian coordinates (x, y, z) or spherical coordinates);
  • the bitmap information of the antenna array element for example: use “1" to indicate that the array element is selected for transmitting and/or receiving sensing signals, use “0" to indicate that the array element is not selected, and vice versa;
  • Bitmap information of the array panel for example: use “1" to indicate that the panel is selected for sending and/or receiving sensing signals, use “0" to indicate that the panel is not selected, and vice versa;
  • bitmap information of the array panel and the bitmap information of the array elements in the selected panel for example: use “1" to indicate that the array element is selected for sending and/or receiving sensing signals, use "0" to indicate that the array element is not selection, and vice versa.
  • the method further includes:
  • the first device sends a first indication message to a second device, the second device includes a core network node, a source node, or a source access base station of the source node, and the first indication message is used to indicate that the The sensing mode of the sensing target is switched from the first sensing mode to the second sensing mode.
  • the method further includes any of the following:
  • the first device re-determines candidate nodes
  • the method when the feedback message is used to indicate that the target candidate node agrees to use the second sensing mode to perform sensing measurements on the sensing target, the method further includes:
  • the first device determines M target nodes from the target candidate nodes according to the feedback message, where M is an integer greater than or equal to 1;
  • the first device sends a first notification message to the M target nodes, where the first notification message is used to instruct the M target nodes to use the second sensing mode to perform sensing measurements on the sensing target.
  • the first notification message can be understood as a switching confirmation message or a switching command.
  • the target node After receiving the first notification message, the target node confirms that the sensing mode of the sensing target is switched from the first sensing mode to the second sensing mode.
  • the target node can switch according to the second sensing mode. way to perform perceptual measurements on perceptual targets.
  • the first device can directly determine or select the target node from the target candidate nodes based on the feedback message. That is to say, the first device can directly determine or select the target node from the target candidate nodes based on the information it has. Determine the target node that can meet the sensing needs or sensing QoS requirements.
  • the first device is the same as the source node
  • One of the M target nodes is the source node, or none of the M target nodes is the source node.
  • the number of target nodes determined by the first device may be 1 (applicable to when the source node still serves as the target node), it can also be 2 (applicable to the situation where the source node no longer serves as the target node), or it can be greater than 2 (applicable to the situation where multiple pairs of sensing nodes cooperate to perform the second sensing of the sensing target, that is, A1 sends B1 Receive, A2 sends and B2 receives).
  • the first notification message includes second parameter configuration information, and the second parameter configuration information is used to instruct the target node to perform sensing measurement on the sensing target.
  • the second parameter configuration information can be understood as the sensing parameter configuration information recommended by the first device.
  • the information contained in the second parameter configuration information can be the same as the first parameter configuration information. To avoid duplication, this will not be described again.
  • the target node can perform sensing measurement on the sensing target.
  • the perception measurement may be performed based on the second parameter configuration information, the perception measurement may also be performed based on the first parameter configuration information, or the perception measurement may be performed based on a part of the first parameter configuration information and the second parameter configuration information respectively.
  • the method further includes:
  • the first device sends first information to the M target nodes, where the first information includes at least one of the following:
  • the sensing measurement quantity in the first information may be the same as or different from the sensing measurement quantity after the sensing switching is completed.
  • the first device After determining the target node, the first device helps the target node to perform sensing measurements on the sensing target by sending the first information to the target node, thereby further improving sensing performance.
  • the first device is different from the source node, and the method further includes:
  • the first device sends a second notification message to the source node, where the second notification message is used to instruct the source node to stop using the first sensing mode to perform sensing measurements on the sensing target.
  • the second notification message can also be called an end command.
  • the first device sends the second notification message to the source node so that the source node After receiving the second notification message, the node stops using the first sensing method to perform sensing measurements on the sensing target, which can reduce power consumption of the source node.
  • the source node if it no longer performs the second sensing as the target node, after receiving the second notification message, it can stop performing the first sensing of the sensing target and release the resources occupied by sensing, such as time and frequency. resources, antenna port resources, etc. If it is still performing the second sensing as the target node, after receiving the second notification message, it can only stop performing the first sensing of the sensing target without releasing the resources occupied by the sensing.
  • the first device can have multiple options for sending the second notification message to the source node. For example, once the first device determines the target node, it can send the second notification message to the source node without considering whether the sensing switch is successful. .
  • the sensing switching mode corresponding to this method can be called a hard switching mode.
  • the first device sends a second notification message to the source node, including:
  • the first device When the first device receives the third notification message, the first device sends the second notification message to the source node, The third notification message is used to indicate that the target node has performed at least one sensing measurement on the sensing target using the second sensing method, and obtained a measurement value of at least one sensing measurement quantity or at least one sensing result.
  • the third notification message can also be called a handover success message, and is used to indicate that the target node has successfully performed sensing measurements on the sensing target using the second sensing method, for example, at least one sensing measurement, and obtained at least one measurement value of the sensing measurement quantity or at least A perceived result.
  • the timing when the first device sends the second notification message to the source node is after the handover is successful.
  • the perceptual handover mode corresponding to this method may be called a soft handover mode.
  • the source node can end the first sensing with poor reliability as soon as possible, the power loss caused by unnecessary sensing operations by the source node can be avoided.
  • soft switching mode the continuity of perception of the sensing target can be better maintained.
  • the first device is the same as the source node, and the method further includes:
  • the first device stops using the first sensing method to perform sensing measurements on the sensing target.
  • the first device can have multiple choices for when to stop using the first sensing method to perform sensing measurements on the sensing target. For example, once the first device determines the target node, it can send a second notification message to the source node without Consider whether the sensing switch is successful.
  • the sensing switching mode corresponding to this method can be called a hard switching mode.
  • the first device stops using the first sensing method to perform sensing measurements on the sensing target, including:
  • the first device When the first device receives a fourth notification message, the first device stops using the first sensing mode to perform sensing measurements on the sensing target.
  • the fourth notification message is used to instruct the target node to use the third sensing mode.
  • the second sensing method performs at least one sensing measurement on the sensing target and obtains a measurement value of at least one sensing measurement quantity or at least one sensing result.
  • the fourth notification message may also be called a handover success message, and is used to indicate that the target node has successfully performed sensing measurements on the sensing target using the second sensing method, for example, at least one sensing measurement, and obtained at least one measurement value of the sensing measurement quantity or at least A perceived result.
  • the time when the first device stops using the first sensing method to perform sensing measurements on the sensing target is after the handover is successful.
  • the sensing switching mode corresponding to this method may be called a soft handover mode.
  • the first request message may also include a soft handover request, and if the target candidate node agrees and supports soft handover, the first parameter configuration information may also include soft handover parameter configuration information, and the soft handover parameter configuration information may be understood as In the case of using soft handover mode, the target node performs sensing parameter configuration information for sensing measurement on the sensing target.
  • the target node can also carry soft handover parameter configuration information in the second parameter configuration information.
  • the method further includes:
  • the first device sends a fourth message to a target candidate node other than the target node among the target candidate nodes.
  • Notification message the fifth notification message is used to indicate that after receiving the fifth notification message, the sensing measurement of the sensing target is cancelled.
  • target candidate nodes other than the target node do not need to perform sensing operations on the sensing target, therefore, these target candidate nodes are notified through the fifth notification message to cancel sensing measurement of the sensing target, which can avoid these target candidates.
  • Switching of sensing modes in the mobile communication network is divided into two situations: switching from the first sensing mode to the second sensing mode, and switching from the second sensing mode to the first sensing mode.
  • Figure 2a shows a situation where the first sensing mode is switched to a second sensing mode
  • Figure 2b shows a situation where the second sensing mode is switched to the first sensing mode.
  • the sensing node in the network may change before and after the handover, and that the sensing node may be a network-side device or a UE after the handover
  • each of the above two handover situations has 6 combinations.
  • Figure 2c shows 6 combinations of each of the above two handover situations, in which the network side device is a base station.
  • the sensing node may be a different device, base station A, base station B, base station C, UE A, UE B, UE C to distinguish.
  • the core network node may be a sensing function network element with sensing network function in the core network.
  • switching from the first sensing mode to the second sensing mode is performed.
  • switching from the first sensing mode to the second sensing mode may include the following six switching scenarios:
  • Switching scenario 1 The first perception of the network side device (referred to as the “first perception of the base station”) is switched to the second perception of the network side device-terminal (referred to as the “second perception of the base station-UE");
  • Switching scenario 2 The first perception of the network side device is switched to the second perception of the network side device - the network side device (referred to as "base station - second perception of the base station");
  • Switching scenario 3 The first perception of the terminal (referred to as “UE first perception") is switched to the second perception of the network side device-terminal;
  • Switching scenario 4 The first perception of the terminal is switched to the second perception of terminal-terminal (referred to as "UE-UE second perception");
  • Switching scenario 5 The first perception of the network side device is switched to the second perception of terminal-terminal;
  • Switching scenario 6 The first perception of the terminal is switched to the second perception of the network side device-the network side device.
  • Handover scenario 1 The base station's first sensing is switched to the base station-UE's second sensing, which specifically includes the following process.
  • Step 11 The network side device performs handover measurement.
  • the core network node (such as the sensing function network element) sends a handover measurement request to the source base station (that is, the network side device that performs the first sensing). After receiving the handover measurement request, the source base station performs handover measurement and feeds back the handover measurement report to the core network node. ;
  • the source base station actively performs handover measurement and obtains a handover measurement report.
  • the source base station sends a handover measurement report to the core network node.
  • the core network node may send handover measurement configuration information necessary for handover measurement to the source base station.
  • the handover measurement configuration information is included in the handover measurement request.
  • the above step 11 can be triggered based on the target event.
  • the content of the target event please refer to the foregoing description and will not be repeated here.
  • Step 12 The source base station decides whether to initiate handover based on the handover measurement report.
  • the core network node decides whether to initiate a handover request based on the handover measurement report obtained from the source base station.
  • subsequent processing may be to maintain or end the current first sensing.
  • the core network node or the source base station decides which node switches to the second sensing mode, which can be divided into one of the following situations:
  • Case 1 The source base station decides to switch to base station-UE second sensing.
  • the source base station sends first request information to at least one candidate target base station, where the first request information requests the recipient of the first request information to perform second base station-UE sensing after the sensing mode switching is completed.
  • the candidate target base station sends second request information to at least one candidate target UE, and the second request information requests the recipient of the second request information to perform second base station-UE sensing after the sensing mode switching is completed.
  • the source base station sends first indication information to the core network node, and the first indication information notifies the recipient of the first indication information to perform second sensing by the base station-UE after the sensing mode is switched.
  • Scenario 2 The core network node decides to switch to base station-UE second sensing.
  • the core network node sends first request information to at least one candidate target base station.
  • the candidate target base station sends the second request information to at least one candidate target UE.
  • the core network node sends the first indication information to the source base station.
  • the candidate target base station includes a source base station.
  • Case 3 The source base station decides to actively switch to base station-UE second sensing.
  • the source base station is a candidate target base station.
  • the source base station sends the second request information to at least one candidate target UE.
  • the source base station sends second indication information to the core network node, where the second indication information instructs the second indication information receiver, and the second indication information sender performs the second sensing after the sensing mode switching is completed.
  • case 3 also includes case 1, in which at least one candidate target base station is a candidate target base station other than the source base station.
  • the source base station or core network node includes the suggested third parameter configuration information in the first request information and/or the second request information.
  • the third parameter configuration information is used for any at least one of the candidate target base station, the candidate target UE, the target base station, and the target UE to perform second sensing sensing parameter configuration.
  • the third parameter configuration information includes parameter configuration information corresponding to the soft handover.
  • the determination of the above candidate target base stations may be based on at least one of the following information:
  • Base station sensing capability information including base station sensing coverage, maximum bandwidth available for sensing, sensing industry At least one of the maximum service duration, supported sensing signal type and frame format, and base station antenna array information (such as array type, number of antennas, array aperture, antenna polarization characteristics, array element gain, directivity characteristics, etc.) item);
  • the resource information that the base station can currently use for sensing including time resources (number of symbols, number of time slots, number of frames, etc.), number of RBs, number of REs, total bandwidth, available frequency band locations, etc.), antenna resources (antennas/antenna sub-sections, etc.) At least one of array number), phase modulation resources (number of hardware phase shifters) and orthogonal code resources (orthogonal code length and number));
  • Channel state information of the base station including at least one of the channel transfer function/channel impulse response of at least one communication link, CQI, PMI, CSI-RS resource indication, SSB resource indication, LI, RI and L1-RSRP ).
  • the determination of the above candidate target UE may be based on at least one of the following information:
  • UE status information including moving speed, moving direction, time period of remaining stationary/moving, etc.
  • UE sensing capability information including UE sensing coverage, maximum bandwidth available for sensing, maximum duration of sensing services, supported sensing signal types and frame formats, and UE antenna array information (array type, number of antennas, At least one of the array aperture, antenna polarization characteristics, array element gain, directivity characteristics, etc.);
  • the resource information that the UE can currently use for sensing including time resources (number of symbols, number of time slots, number of frames, etc.), number of RBs, number of REs, total bandwidth, available frequency band locations, etc.), antenna resources (antennas/antenna sub-sections, etc.) At least one of array number), phase modulation resources (number of hardware phase shifters) and orthogonal code resources (orthogonal code length and number));
  • Channel state information of the UE including at least one of the channel transfer function/channel impulse response of at least one communication link, CQI, PMI, CSI-RS resource indication, SSB resource indication, LI, RI and L1-RSRP ).
  • the above first request information also includes at least one of the following information:
  • Perception requirements include perception target area/object type, required perception functions, perception purpose, perception results, etc.
  • Perceptual measurement results including perceptual results obtained directly or indirectly based on at least one perceptual measurement quantity
  • Perception conditions including at least one of perception start time, perception end time, perception duration, etc.
  • Prior information of the sensing target or sensing area including at least one of the sensing target type, the approximate location/area of the sensing target, and the historical status of the sensing target (speed, angle, distance, acceleration, spatial orientation));
  • the above-mentioned second request information also includes at least one of the following information: the same as the first request information.
  • Step 13 The candidate target base station and the candidate target UE decide whether to accept performing the first sensing after switching the sensing mode. Divided into the following two situations:
  • Scenario 1 The candidate target base station and the candidate target UE agree to handover. Then execute the following process in sequence:
  • the candidate target UE sends the second response information to the second request information sender (candidate target base station or source base station).
  • the second response information indicates the second request information sender.
  • the second response information is The sender of the second response message agrees to perform the first sensing.
  • the candidate target base station After receiving the second response information sent by the candidate target UE, the candidate target base station sends the first response information to the first request information sender (source base station or core network node), and the first response information indicates the first The request information sender, after the sensing mode switching is completed, the first response information sender agrees to perform the first sensing.
  • the first request information sender source base station or core network node
  • the first response information content includes second response information content.
  • Subcarrier spacing such as the subcarrier spacing of OFDM system, such as 30KHz;
  • Guard interval such as the time interval from the time when the signal ends sending to the time when the latest echo signal of the signal is received
  • this parameter is proportional to the maximum sensing distance, for example, it can be calculated by 2d max /c, where, d max Indicates the maximum sensing distance (belonging to sensing requirements).
  • d max represents the maximum distance from the sensing signal transceiver point to the signal emission point.
  • the OFDM signal CP can be used to indicate the minimum guard interval;
  • this parameter is inversely proportional to the distance resolution and can be obtained by c/(2 ⁇ d), where ⁇ d represents the distance resolution (belonging to the perception requirements) and c represents the speed of light;
  • Burst duration This parameter is inversely proportional to the rate resolution (belongs to the sensing requirements). This parameter is the time span of the sensing signal. It is mainly used to calculate the Doppler frequency offset. This parameter can be passed c/(2f c ⁇ v) Calculated, where ⁇ v represents the speed resolution, f c represents the carrier frequency of the sensing signal;
  • Time domain interval This parameter can be calculated by c/(2f c v range ), where v range represents the maximum rate minus the minimum speed (belonging to the sensing requirements). This parameter is the time between two adjacent sensing signals. interval;
  • Transmit signal power for example, take a value every 2dBm from -20dBm to 23dBm;
  • Signal format such as SRS, DMRS, PRS, etc., or other predefined signals, as well as related sequence format and other information;
  • Signal direction such as the direction of the perceived signal or beam information
  • Time resources such as the time slot index where the sensing signal is located or the symbol index of the time slot.
  • Time resources are divided into two types. One is a one-time time resource, such as one symbol transmitting an omnidirectional sensing signal; the other is a non- One-time time resources, such as multiple groups of periodic time resources or discontinuous time resources (can include start time and end time) Beam time), each group of periodic time resources sends sensing signals in the same direction, and the beam directions on different groups of periodic time resources are different;
  • Frequency resources include the center frequency point, bandwidth, RB or subcarrier of the sensing signal, reference point A, starting bandwidth position, etc.;
  • the sensing signal includes multiple resources, each resource is associated with an SSB QCL, and the QCL includes Type A, Type B, Type C or Type D;
  • the candidate target UE feeds back the suggested second parameter configuration information in the second response information.
  • the second parameter configuration information is used to configure the sensing parameters for the candidate target sensing node to perform first sensing.
  • the first parameter configuration information content includes the second parameter configuration information content.
  • the first parameter configuration information includes soft handover parameter configuration information.
  • the second parameter configuration information includes soft handover parameter configuration information.
  • Scenario 2 At least one of the candidate target base station and the candidate target UE disagrees with the handover:
  • the candidate target base station sends the first rejection information to the first request information sender (source base station or core network node), the first rejection information indicates the first request information sender, and the first rejection information sender does not perform First perception.
  • the candidate target UE sends second rejection information to the second request information sender (source base station or candidate target base station), where the second rejection information indicates the second request information sender, and the second rejection information sender does not perform First perception.
  • the subsequent processing may be one of the following: the source base station re-determines the candidate target UE; the candidate target base station re-determines the candidate target UE; the source base station or the core network node re-determines the candidate target base station, and the candidate target base station determines the candidate target UE; cancel the handover and maintain Current second perception; end current second perception.
  • Step 14 The source base station or core network node determines the sensing node that performs the first sensing. Divided into the following two situations:
  • Case 1 The source base station or core network node determines the target base station, and the target base station determines the target UE.
  • the source base station or the core network node determines at least one target base station among the candidate target base stations as the sensing node that performs the first sensing after handover.
  • the source base station or core network node sends a handover command to the target base station.
  • the switching command is used to notify the target sensing node to perform a first sensing operation.
  • the target base station After receiving the first handover command, the target base station determines at least one target UE among candidate target UEs as a sensing node that performs first sensing after handover. Further, the target base station sends a handover command to the target UE.
  • Case 2 The source base station or core network node determines the target base station and the target UE at the same time.
  • the source base station or the core network node determines at least one target base station and at least one target UE among the candidate target base stations as sensing nodes that perform first sensing after handover.
  • the source base station or core network node sends a handover command to the target base station, and the target base station sends a handover command to the target UE.
  • the source base station or core network node feeds back the suggested third parameter configuration information in the handover command.
  • the third parameter configuration information is used for the target sensing node to configure sensing parameters for performing first sensing.
  • the third parameter configuration information includes at least one of the following: the same as the first parameter configuration information.
  • the third parameter configuration information includes soft handover parameter configuration information.
  • Step 15 The target base station and the target UE perform the first sensing service. Specifically, the following two operations are performed:
  • Operation 1 Use the soft handover method.
  • the target base station and the target UE perform sensing parameter configuration based on at least one of the first request information, the first parameter configuration information, the second parameter configuration information, and the third parameter configuration information, and perform the first sensing.
  • the target base station or the target UE After the target base station or the target UE obtains at least one measurement value and/or sensing result of the sensing measurement quantity, the target base station sends a handover success message to the source base station or core network node.
  • the sender of the first request information is the source base station, and the source base station and the target base station are not the same device:
  • the source base station After receiving the handover success message, the source base station ends the original sensing operation and releases the resources occupied by sensing (including time-frequency resources, antenna port resources, etc.);
  • the sender of the first request information is the core network node, and the source base station and the target base station are not the same device:
  • the core network node After the core network node receives the handover success message, the core network node sends a first end command to the source base station.
  • the source base station ends the original sensing operation and releases the resources occupied by sensing (including time-frequency resources, antenna port resources, etc.);
  • the sender of the first request information is the core network node, and the source base station and the target base station are the same device:
  • the core network node After receiving the handover success message, the core network node sends a second end command to the source base station.
  • the source base station ends the original sensing operation
  • the source base station actively acts as the target base station:
  • the source base station After the handover is successful, the source base station actively ends the original sensing operation.
  • Operation 2 Use the hard switching method. While performing step 14, the source base station or core network node does not need to wait for the handover success message. Including one of the following situations:
  • the sender of the first request information is the source base station, and the source base station and the target base station are not the same device:
  • the source base station ends the original sensing operation and releases the resources occupied by sensing (including time-frequency resources, antenna port resources, etc.);
  • the sender of the first request information is the core network node, and the source base station and the target base station are not the same device:
  • the core network node sends the first end command to the source base station.
  • the source base station ends the original sensing operation and releases the resources occupied by sensing (including time-frequency resources, antenna port resources, etc.);
  • the sender of the first request information is the core network node, and the source base station and the target base station are the same device:
  • the source base station actively ends the original sensing operation
  • the source base station actively acts as the target base station:
  • the source base station actively terminates the original sensing operation.
  • the source base station or core network node sends historical measurement values and/or historical sensing results and sensing target/area prior information of part or all of the sensing measurement quantities to the target UE.
  • the sensing measurement quantity before sensing mode switching can be It is the same as or different from the perceptual measurement quantity after the perceptual mode is switched.
  • Switching scenario 2 The base station's first sensing is switched to the base station-the base station's second sensing, which specifically includes the following process.
  • Step 21 Same as step 11 and will not be repeated here.
  • Step 22 The source base station decides whether to initiate handover based on the handover measurement report.
  • the core network node decides whether to initiate a handover request based on the handover measurement report obtained from the source base station.
  • subsequent processing may be to maintain or end the current first sensing.
  • Scenario 1 The source base station decides to switch to base station-base station first sensing.
  • the source base station sends third request information to at least two candidate target base stations, where the third request information requests the recipient of the third request information to perform base station-to-base station first sensing after the sensing mode switching is completed.
  • the source base station sends third indication information to the core network node, and the third indication information notifies the recipient of the first indication information to perform base station-to-base station first sensing after the sensing mode is switched.
  • Scenario 2 The core network node decides to switch to the base station - the base station is the first to sense.
  • the core network node sends third request information to at least two candidate target base stations.
  • the core network node sends third indication information to the source base station.
  • the candidate target base stations include source base stations.
  • Scenario 3 The source base station decides to actively switch to the base station - the base station is the first to sense.
  • the source base station is a candidate target base station.
  • the source base station sends third request information to at least one candidate target base station.
  • the source base station sends second indication information to the core network node, where the second indication information instructs the second indication information receiver, and the second indication information sender performs the first sensing after the sensing mode switching is completed.
  • the third request information also includes at least one of the following information: the same as the first request information.
  • Step 23 The candidate target base station decides whether to accept performing the first sensing after switching the sensing mode. Divided into the following two situations:
  • Scenario 1 The candidate target base station agrees to handover.
  • the candidate target base station sends the first response information to the first request information sender (source base station or core network node).
  • the candidate target base station feeds back the suggested first parameter configuration information in the first response information.
  • the first parameter configuration information includes soft handover parameter configuration information.
  • Scenario 2 The candidate target base station does not agree to handover.
  • the subsequent processing may be one of the following: the source base station or the core network node re-determines the candidate target base station; cancels the handover. Change, maintain the current second perception; end the current second perception.
  • Step 24 The source base station or core network node determines the sensing node that performs the first sensing.
  • the source base station or core network node determines at least two target base stations (base station A and base station B) among the candidate target base stations as sensing nodes that perform first sensing after handover.
  • the source base station or core network node sends a handover command to the target base station.
  • the target base station includes a source base station.
  • the source base station or core network node feeds back the suggested third parameter configuration information in the handover command.
  • the third parameter configuration information includes at least one of the following: the same as the first parameter configuration information.
  • the third parameter configuration information includes soft handover parameter configuration information.
  • Step 25 The target base station (base station A, base station B) performs the first sensing. Specifically, subsequent processing is divided into the following two situations:
  • Scenario 1 Use soft handover method.
  • the target base station (base station A, base station B) configures sensing parameters based on at least one of the first request information, first parameter configuration information, second parameter configuration information, and third parameter configuration information, and performs the first sensing.
  • the target base station After the target base station obtains at least one measurement value and/or sensing result of the sensing measurement quantity, the target base station sends a handover success message to the source base station or core network node.
  • the sender of the third request information is the source base station, and the source base station and the target base station are not the same device:
  • the source base station After receiving the handover success message, the source base station ends the original sensing operation and releases the resources occupied by sensing (including time-frequency resources, antenna port resources, etc.);
  • the sender of the third request information is the core network node, and the source base station and the target base station are not the same device:
  • the core network node After the core network node receives the handover success message, the core network node sends a first end command to the source base station. After receiving the first end command, the source base station ends the original sensing operation and releases the resources occupied by sensing (including time-frequency resources, antenna port resources, etc.);
  • the sender of the third request information is the core network node, and the source base station and the target base station are the same device:
  • the core network node After receiving the handover success message, the core network node sends a second end command to the source base station.
  • the source base station ends the original sensing operation
  • the source base station actively serves as the target base station (base station A or base station B):
  • the source base station After the handover is successful, the source base station actively ends the original sensing operation.
  • Scenario 2 Use the hard switching method. While performing step 24, the source base station or core network node does not need to wait for the handover success message. Including one of the following situations:
  • the sender of the third request information is the source base station, and the source base station and the target base station are not the same device:
  • the source base station ends the original sensing operation and releases the resources occupied by sensing (including time-frequency resources, antenna port resources, etc.);
  • the sender of the third request information is the core network node, and the source base station and the target base station are not the same device:
  • the core network node sends the first end command to the source base station.
  • the source base station ends the original sensing operation and releases the space occupied by sensing. resources (including time-frequency resources, antenna port resources, etc.);
  • the sender of the third request information is the core network node, and the source base station and the target base station are the same device:
  • the source base station actively ends the original sensing operation
  • the source base station actively acts as the target base station:
  • the source base station actively terminates the original sensing operation.
  • the source base station or core network node sends historical measurement values and/or historical sensing results and sensing target/area prior information of part or all of the sensing measurement quantities to the target base station.
  • Handover scenario 3 The UE's first perception is switched to the base station-UE's second perception, which specifically includes the following process.
  • Step 31 The network side device performs handover measurement.
  • the source terminal actively initiates handover measurement and obtains a handover measurement report.
  • the source terminal sends a handover measurement report to the source access base station (that is, the access base station of the source terminal) and/or the core network node;
  • the source access base station sends a handover measurement request to the source terminal.
  • the source terminal After receiving the handover measurement request, the source terminal performs handover measurement and feeds back the handover measurement report to the source access base station; optionally, the source access base station sends a handover measurement request to the core network node. Switch measurement report;
  • the core network node (for example, the sensing function network element) sends a handover measurement request to the source terminal.
  • the source terminal After receiving the handover measurement request, the source terminal performs handover measurement and feeds back the handover measurement report to the core network node; optionally, the core network node sends a handover measurement request to the source terminal.
  • the source access base station sends a handover measurement report.
  • the source access base station or core network node sends handover measurement configuration information necessary for handover measurement to the source terminal.
  • the handover measurement configuration information is included in the handover measurement request.
  • the content contained in the handover measurement configuration information may refer to the above embodiment, and will not be described again here.
  • the above step 31 can be triggered based on the target event.
  • the content of the target event can be referred to the above embodiment and will not be described again here.
  • Step 32 The source access base station or core network node decides whether to initiate a handover based on the handover measurement report.
  • subsequent processing may be to maintain or end the current first sensing (ie, the sensing operation performed according to the first sensing mode).
  • any one of the core network node, source access base station, and source UE decides which node switches to the first sensing mode, which is specifically divided into the following situations:
  • Case 1 The source access base station decides to switch to base station-UE second sensing.
  • the source access base station sends first request information to at least one candidate target base station.
  • the candidate target base station sends second request information to at least one candidate target UE.
  • the source access base station sends the first indication information to the core network node.
  • Scenario 2 The core network node decides to switch to base station-UE second sensing.
  • the core network node sends first request information to at least one candidate target base station.
  • the candidate target base station sends second request information to at least one candidate target UE.
  • the core network node sends the first indication information to the source access base station.
  • the candidate target base stations include source access base stations.
  • Scenario 3 The source UE decides to actively switch to the base station - the UE is first aware.
  • the source UE is a candidate target UE.
  • the source access base station or core network node sends first request information to at least one candidate target base station.
  • the candidate target base station sends the second request information to at least one candidate target UE including the source UE.
  • the candidate target base stations include source access base stations.
  • the source access base station or core network node includes the suggested third parameter configuration information in the first request information and/or the second request information.
  • the specific content of the third parameter configuration information may refer to the above embodiment and will not be described again here.
  • Step 33 The candidate target base station and the candidate target UE decide whether to accept performing the first sensing after switching the sensing mode. Divided into the following two situations:
  • Scenario 1 The candidate target base station and the candidate target UE agree to handover. Then execute the following process in sequence:
  • the candidate target base station and the candidate target UE configure sensing parameters based on at least one of the first request information, the second request information, and the third parameter configuration information, and perform the second sensing.
  • the candidate target base station After performing at least one sensing measurement, the candidate target base station sends the first response information to the source access base station or core network node.
  • the content of the first response message may be referred to the above embodiment and will not be described again here.
  • the source access base station or core network node waits for the first response information from the candidate target base station within a preset time. Once the first response information sent by a candidate target base station is received and satisfies the target handover conditions, the source access base station or core network node will immediately select the first response information.
  • the candidate target base station and the candidate target UE that performs the second sensing together with it serve as sensing nodes that perform the second sensing after handover.
  • the candidate target UEs that jointly perform second sensing are UEs that send second response information that satisfies the target switching condition.
  • Scenario 2 At least one of the candidate target base station and the candidate target UE disagrees with the handover.
  • the candidate target UE sends the second rejection information to the sender of the second request information (source base station or candidate target base station), the second rejection information is the sender of the second indication information, and the sender of the second rejection information No second perception occurs.
  • the subsequent processing may be one of the following: the source base station re-determines the candidate target UE; the candidate target base station re-determines the candidate target UE; the source base station or The core network node re-determines the candidate target base station, and the candidate target base station determines the candidate target UE; cancels the handover and maintains the current first sensing; ends the current first sensing.
  • Step 34 The source base station or core network node determines the sensing node that performs the first sensing. Divided into the following two situations:
  • Case 1 The source base station or core network node determines the target base station, and the target base station determines the target UE.
  • the source base station or the core network node determines at least one target base station among the candidate target base stations as the sensing node that performs the first sensing after handover.
  • the source base station or core network node sends a handover command to the target base station.
  • the target base station After receiving the first handover command, the target base station determines at least one target UE among candidate target UEs as a sensing node that performs first sensing after handover. Further, the target base station sends a handover command to the target UE.
  • Case 2 The source base station or core network node determines the target base station and the target UE at the same time.
  • the source base station or the core network node determines at least one target base station and at least one target UE among the candidate target base stations as sensing nodes that perform first sensing after handover.
  • the source base station or core network node sends a handover command to the target base station, and the target base station sends a handover command to the target UE.
  • the source base station or core network node feeds back the suggested third parameter configuration information in the handover command.
  • the third parameter configuration information includes at least one of the following: the same as the first parameter configuration information.
  • the third parameter configuration information includes soft handover parameter configuration information.
  • Step 35 The target base station and the target UE execute the first sensing service. Specifically, the subsequent processing is divided into the following two situations:
  • Scenario 1 Use soft handover method.
  • the target base station and the target UE perform sensing parameter configuration based on at least one of the first request information, the first parameter configuration information, the second parameter configuration information, and the third parameter configuration information, and perform the first sensing.
  • the target base station or the target UE After the target base station or the target UE obtains at least one measurement value and/or sensing result of the sensing measurement quantity, the target base station sends a handover success message to the source access base station or core network node.
  • the sender of the first request information is the source access base station or core network node, and the source UE and the target UE are not the same device:
  • the source access base station or core network node After receiving the handover success message, the source access base station or core network node sends a first end command to the source UE.
  • the source UE ends the original sensing operation and releases the resources occupied by sensing (including time-frequency resources, antenna port resources, etc.);
  • the sender of the first request information is the source access base station or core network node, and the source UE and the target UE are the same device:
  • the source access base station or core network node After receiving the handover success message, the source access base station or core network node sends a second end command to the source UE, and the source UE ends the original sensing operation;
  • the source UE actively acts as the target UE:
  • the source UE After the handover is successful, the source UE actively ends the original sensing operation.
  • Scenario 2 Use the hard switching method. While performing step 34, the source base station or core network node does not need to wait for the handover success message. Including one of the following situations:
  • the sender of the first request information is the source access base station or core network node, and the source UE and the target UE are not the same device:
  • the source access base station or core network node sends a first end command to the source UE, and the source UE ends the original sensing operation and releases the resources occupied by sensing (including time-frequency resources, antenna port resources, etc.);
  • the sender of the first request information is the source access base station or core network node, and the source UE and the target UE are the same device:
  • the source access base station or core network node sends a second end command to the source UE, and the source UE ends the original sensing operation;
  • the source UE actively acts as the target UE:
  • the source UE actively ends the original sensing operation.
  • the source UE or source access base station or core network node sends historical measurement values and/or historical sensing results and sensing target/area prior information of part or all of the sensing measurement quantities to the target UE.
  • Handover scenario 4 UE first perception is switched to UE-UE second perception, which specifically includes the following process.
  • Step 41 Same as step 31 above and will not be repeated here.
  • Step 42 The source access base station or core network node decides whether to initiate a handover based on the handover measurement report.
  • subsequent processing may be to maintain or end the current first sensing (ie, the sensing operation performed according to the first sensing mode).
  • any one of the core network node, source access base station, and source UE decides which node switches to the first sensing mode, which can be divided into one of the following situations:
  • Case 1 The source access base station decides to switch to UE-UE second sensing. This can be done by at least one of the following methods:
  • the source access base station sends a request message A to at least one candidate target access base station (that is, the access base station of the candidate target UE).
  • the request message A is the recipient of the request message A, and is performed after the sensing mode switching is completed.
  • the candidate target access base station sends second request information to at least two candidate target UEs, and the second request information requests the recipient of the second request information to perform UE-UE second sensing after the sensing mode switching is completed.
  • the source access base station sends the second request information to at least two candidate target UEs.
  • the source access base station sends first indication information to the core network node, and the first indication information notifies the recipient of the first indication information to perform UE-UE second sensing after the sensing mode is switched.
  • Scenario 2 The core network node decides to switch to UE-UE second sensing.
  • the core network node sends first request information to at least one candidate target access base station.
  • the candidate target access base station sends second request information to at least one candidate target UE.
  • the core network node sends the first indication information to the source access base station.
  • the candidate target access base stations include source access base stations.
  • Case 3 The source UE decides to actively switch to UE-UE second sensing.
  • the source UE is a candidate target UE.
  • the source UE sends the second indication information to the source access base station and/or core network node.
  • the source access base station or core network node sends first request information to at least one candidate target access base station.
  • the candidate target access base station sends the second request information to at least two candidate target UEs including the source UE.
  • the candidate target access base stations include source access base stations.
  • the source access base station or core network node includes the suggested third parameter configuration information in the first request information and/or the second request information.
  • the specific content of the third parameter configuration information may refer to the above embodiment and will not be described again here.
  • Step 43 The candidate target UE decides whether to accept performing the first sensing after switching the sensing mode. Divided into the following two situations:
  • Scenario 1 The candidate target UE agrees to handover. Then execute the following process in sequence:
  • the candidate target UE performs sensing parameters based on at least one of the first request information and the third parameter configuration information. Configuration to perform second perception.
  • the candidate target UE After performing at least one sensing measurement, the candidate target UE sends the first response information to the source access base station or core network node.
  • the method may include: the candidate target UE sending the first response information to the candidate target access base station, and the candidate target access base station forwarding the first response information to the source access base station or core network node.
  • the source access base station or core network node waits for the first response information from the candidate target access base station within a preset time. Once the first response information sent by a candidate target access base station is received to meet the target switching conditions, Then, the candidate target UE accessed by the candidate target access base station and corresponding to the sending of the first response information is immediately selected as the sensing node that performs the first sensing after the handover.
  • Scenario 2 The candidate target UE does not agree to handover.
  • the candidate target UE does not agree to the handover. Then optionally, the candidate target UE sends the first rejection information to the fourth request information sender (source access base station or core network node).
  • the method may include: the candidate target UE sending the first rejection information to the candidate target access base station, and the candidate target access base station forwarding the first rejection information to the source access base station or core network node.
  • the subsequent processing may be one of the following: the source access base station re-determines the candidate target UE; the candidate target access base station re-determines the candidate target UE; the source access base station re-determines the candidate target UE.
  • the base station or core network node re-determines the candidate target access base station, and the candidate target access base station determines the candidate target UE; cancels the handover and maintains the current second sensing; ends the current first sensing.
  • Step 44 The source access base station or core network node determines the sensing node that performs the first sensing.
  • the source access base station or core network node determines at least two target UEs (UE A and UE B) among the candidate target UEs as sensing nodes that perform first sensing after handover.
  • the source access base station or core network node sends a handover command to the target UE.
  • the target UE includes a source UE.
  • the source access base station or core network node feeds back the suggested third parameter configuration information in the handover command.
  • the third parameter configuration information includes at least one of the following: the same as the first parameter configuration information.
  • the third parameter configuration information includes soft handover parameter configuration information.
  • Step 45 The target UE (UE A, UE B) performs first sensing. Specifically, subsequent processing is divided into the following two situations:
  • Scenario 1 Use soft handover method.
  • the target UE (UE A, UE B) configures sensing parameters based on at least one of the first request information, the first parameter configuration information, the second parameter configuration information, and the third parameter configuration information, and performs the first sensing.
  • the target UE After the target UE obtains at least one measurement value and/or sensing result of the sensing measurement quantity, the target UE sends a handover success message to the source access base station or core network node.
  • the sender of the request information is the source access base station or core network node, and the source UE and the target UE are not the same device:
  • the source access base station or core network node After receiving the handover success message, the source access base station or core network node sends the first end command to the source UE. End the original sensing operation and release the resources occupied by sensing (including time-frequency resources, antenna port resources, etc.);
  • the request information sender is the source access base station or core network node, and one of the source UE and the target UE is the same device:
  • the source access base station or core network node After receiving the handover success message, the source access base station or core network node sends a second end command to the source UE.
  • the source base station ends the original sensing operation
  • the source UE actively acts as the target UE (UE A or UE B):
  • the source UE After the handover is successful, the source UE actively ends the original sensing operation.
  • Scenario 2 Use the hard switching method. While performing step 44, the source base station or core network node does not need to wait for the handover success message. Including one of the following situations:
  • the sender of the request information is the source access base station or core network node, and the source UE and the target UE are not the same device:
  • the source access base station or core network node sends a first end command to the source UE, and the source UE ends the original sensing operation and releases the resources occupied by sensing (including time-frequency resources, antenna port resources, etc.);
  • the request information sender is the source access base station or core network node, and one of the source UE and the target UE is the same device:
  • the source access base station or core network node sends a second end command to the source UE.
  • the source base station ends the original sensing operation
  • the source UE actively acts as the target UE (UE A or UE B):
  • the source UE actively ends the original sensing operation.
  • the source UE or source access base station or core network node sends historical measurement values and/or historical sensing results and sensing target/area prior information of part or all of the sensing measurement quantities to the target UE.
  • Handover scenario 5 The first sensing of the base station is switched to the second sensing of UE-UE, which specifically includes the following process.
  • Step 51 Same as step 11 and will not be repeated here.
  • Step 52 The source base station or core network node decides whether to initiate a handover based on the handover measurement report.
  • subsequent processing may be to maintain or end the current first sensing.
  • the source base station or core network node decides which node switches to the first sensing mode, which can be divided into one of the following situations:
  • Case 1 The source base station decides to switch to UE-UE first sensing. This can be done by at least one of the following methods:
  • the source base station sends fourth request information to at least one candidate target access base station.
  • the candidate target access base station sends fifth request information to at least two candidate target UEs.
  • the source base station sends the fifth request information to at least two candidate target UEs.
  • the source base station is a candidate target access base station.
  • the source base station sends fourth indication information to the core network node.
  • Scenario 2 The core network node decides to switch to UE-UE first sensing.
  • the core network node sends fourth request information to at least one candidate target access base station.
  • the candidate target base station sends fifth request information to at least one candidate target UE.
  • the core network node sends fourth indication information to the source base station.
  • the candidate target access base stations include source base stations.
  • the fourth request information and the fifth request information may include a soft handover request.
  • the determination of the candidate target base station is based on at least one of the following information: Same as handover scenario 1.
  • the determination of the candidate target UE is based on at least one of the following information: Same as handover scenario 1.
  • the fourth request information and the fifth request information also include at least one of the following information: the same as the first request information in switching scenario 1.
  • Step 53 The candidate target UE decides whether to accept performing the first sensing after switching the sensing mode. Divided into the following two situations:
  • Scenario 1 The candidate target UE agrees to handover.
  • the candidate target UE sends the first response information to the source base station or core network node.
  • the method may include: the candidate target UE sending the first response information to the candidate target access base station, and the candidate target access base station forwarding the first response information to the source base station or core network node.
  • the candidate target UE feeds back the suggested first parameter configuration information in the first response information.
  • the first parameter configuration information includes at least one of the following: Same as switching scenario 1.
  • the first parameter configuration information includes soft handover parameter configuration information.
  • Scenario 2 The candidate target UE does not agree to handover.
  • the candidate target UE sends the first rejection information to the first request information sender (source base station or core network node).
  • the method may include: the candidate target UE sending the first rejection information to the candidate target access base station, and the candidate target access base station forwarding the first rejection information to the source base station or core network node.
  • the subsequent processing may be one of the following: the source base station re-determines the candidate target UE; the candidate target access base station re-determines the candidate target UE; the source base station or core network node re-determines the candidate target access base station, and the candidate target access base station determines the candidate target UE; cancels the handover and maintains the current second perception; ends the current second perception.
  • Step 54 The source base station or core network node determines the sensing node that performs the first sensing.
  • the source base station or core network node determines at least two target UEs (UE A and UE B) among the candidate target UEs as sensing nodes that perform first sensing after handover.
  • the source base station or core network node sends a handover command to the target UE.
  • the source base station or core network node can send a handover command to the target access base station, and the target access base station forwards the handover command to the target UE.
  • the source base station or core network node feeds back the suggested third parameter configuration information in the handover command.
  • the third parameter configuration information includes at least one of the following: the same as the first parameter configuration information.
  • the third parameter configuration information includes soft handover parameter configuration information.
  • Step 55 The target UE (UE A, UE B) performs first sensing. Specifically, subsequent processing is divided into the following two situations:
  • Scenario 1 Use soft handover method.
  • the target UE (UE A, UE B) configures sensing parameters based on at least one of the first request information, the first parameter configuration information, the second parameter configuration information, and the third parameter configuration information, and performs the first sensing.
  • the target UE After the target UE obtains the measurement quantity and/or the sensing result of at least one sensing measurement quantity, the target UE reports to the source base station or The core network node sends a handover success message.
  • the sender of the request information is the source base station, and the source base station and the target access base station are not the same device:
  • the source base station After receiving the handover success message, the source base station ends the original sensing operation and releases the resources occupied by sensing (including time-frequency resources, antenna port resources, etc.);
  • the sender of the request information is the core network node, and the source base station and the target access base station are not the same device:
  • the core network node After receiving the handover success message, the core network node sends the first end command to the source base station, and the source base station ends the original sensing operation and releases the resources occupied by sensing (including time-frequency resources, antenna port resources, etc.);
  • the sender of the request information is the source base station, and the source base station and the target access base station are the same device:
  • the source base station After receiving the handover success message, the source base station ends the original sensing operation
  • the sender of the request information is the core network node, and the source base station and the target access base station are the same device:
  • the core network node After receiving the handover success message, the core network node sends a second end command to the source base station, and the source base station ends the original sensing operation.
  • Scenario 2 Use the hard switching method. While performing step 54, the source base station or core network node does not need to wait for the handover success message. Including one of the following situations:
  • the sender of the request information is the source base station, and the source base station and the target access base station are not the same device:
  • the source base station ends the original sensing operation and releases the resources occupied by sensing (including time-frequency resources, antenna port resources, etc.);
  • the sender of the request information is the core network node, and the source base station and the target access base station are not the same device:
  • the core network node sends a first end command to the source base station, and the source base station ends the original sensing operation and releases the resources occupied by sensing (including time-frequency resources, antenna port resources, etc.);
  • the sender of the request information is the source base station, and the source base station and the target access base station are the same device:
  • the source base station ends the original sensing operation
  • the sender of the request information is the core network node, and the source base station and the target access base station are the same device:
  • the core network node sends a second end command to the source base station, and the source base station ends the original sensing operation.
  • the source UE or source base station or core network node sends historical measurement values and/or historical sensing results of some or all of the sensing measurement quantities, and sensing target/area prior information to the target UE (UE A and/or UE B). ).
  • Handover scenario 6 The first sensing of the UE is switched to the second sensing of the base station - the second sensing of the base station, which specifically includes the following process.
  • Step 61 Same as step 31 and will not be repeated here.
  • Step 62 The source access base station or core network node decides whether to initiate a handover based on the handover measurement report.
  • subsequent processing may be to maintain or end the current first sensing.
  • any one of the core network node, source access base station, and source UE decides which node switches to the first sensing mode, which can be divided into one of the following situations:
  • Scenario 1 The source access base station decides to switch to base station-base station first sensing.
  • the source access base station sends third request information to at least two candidate target base stations.
  • the source access base station sends third indication information to the core network node.
  • Scenario 2 The core network node decides to switch to the base station - the base station is the first to sense.
  • the core network node sends third request information to at least two candidate target base stations.
  • the core network node sends third indication information to the source access base station.
  • the candidate target base stations include source access base stations.
  • the source access base station decides to actively switch to the base station - the base station is the first sensing station.
  • the source access base station is the candidate target base station.
  • the source access base station sends the second indication information to the core network node.
  • the source access base station or core network node sends third request information to at least one candidate target base station.
  • the third request information may include a soft handover request.
  • the determination of the candidate target base station is based on at least one of the following information: Same as handover scenario 1.
  • the third request information also includes at least one of the following information: the same as the first request information in switching scenario 1.
  • Step 63 The candidate target base station decides whether to accept performing the first sensing after switching the sensing mode. Divided into the following two situations:
  • Scenario 1 The candidate target base station agrees to handover.
  • the candidate target base station sends the first response information to the first request information sender (source access base station or core network node).
  • the candidate target base station feeds back the suggested first parameter configuration information in the first response information.
  • the first parameter configuration information includes at least one of the following: Same as switching scenario 1.
  • the first parameter configuration information includes soft handover parameter configuration information.
  • Scenario 2 The candidate target base station does not agree to handover.
  • the candidate target base station sends the first rejection information to the first request information sender (source access base station or core network node).
  • the subsequent processing may be one of the following: the source access base station or the core network node re-determines the candidate target base station; cancels the handover and maintains the current first sensing; ends the current first sensing.
  • Step 64 The source access base station or core network node determines the sensing node that performs the first sensing.
  • the source access base station or core network node determines at least two target base stations (base station A and base station B) among the candidate target base stations as sensing nodes that perform first sensing after handover.
  • the source access base station or core network node sends a handover command to the target base station.
  • the target base station includes a source access base station.
  • the source access base station or core network node feeds back the suggested third parameter configuration information in the handover command.
  • the third parameter configuration information includes at least one of the following: the same as the first parameter configuration information.
  • the third parameter configuration information includes soft handover parameter configuration information.
  • Step 65 The target base station (base station A, base station B) performs the first sensing. Specifically, subsequent processing is divided into the following two situations:
  • Scenario 1 Use soft handover method.
  • the target base station (base station A, base station B) based on the first request information, the first parameter At least one of the number configuration information, the second parameter configuration information, and the third parameter configuration information is used to configure the sensing parameters and perform the first sensing.
  • the target base station After the target base station obtains at least one measurement value and/or sensing result of the sensing measurement quantity, the target base station sends a handover success message to the source access base station or core network node.
  • the source access base station or core network node After receiving the handover success message, the source access base station or core network node sends a first end command to the source UE.
  • the source UE ends the original sensing operation and releases the resources occupied by sensing (including time-frequency resources, antenna port resources, etc.).
  • Scenario 2 Use the hard switching method. While performing step 4, the source access base station or core network node does not need to wait for the handover success message.
  • the source access base station or core network node sends a first end command to the source UE.
  • the source UE ends the original sensing operation and releases the resources occupied by sensing (including time-frequency resources, antenna port resources, etc.).
  • the source UE or source access base station or core network node sends part or all of the measurement values of historical sensing measurement quantities and/or historical sensing results, and sensing target/area prior information to the target base station.
  • the sensing node adopts the first sensing mode to perform sensing measurement on the sensing target
  • the sensing measurement can be performed in an appropriate sensing mode. to improve the reliability of perceptual measurements.
  • the execution subject may be a sensing mode switching device.
  • a sensing mode switching device performing a sensing mode switching method is used as an example to illustrate the device for switching the sensing mode provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • an embodiment of the present application also provides a sensing mode switching device, which can be applied to the first device.
  • the sensing mode switching device 300 includes:
  • Obtaining module 301 is used to obtain a first measurement report.
  • the first measurement report is generated by the source node using a first sensing mode to perform a first sensing measurement on the sensing target.
  • the signal sending node in the first sensing mode and the The signal receiving node in the first sensing mode is the same node, and the first device is the same as or different from the source node;
  • the first determination module 302 is configured to determine, according to the first measurement report, whether to initiate switching of the sensing mode of the sensing target from the first sensing mode to the second sensing mode, and the signal transmission of the second sensing mode.
  • the node and the signal receiving node of the second sensing mode are different nodes.
  • the first device includes any of the following:
  • the source node is a first network-side device
  • the first device includes a core network node or the first network-side device
  • the first device When the source node is a first terminal, the first device includes a core network node, the first terminal, or a second network side device accessed by the first terminal.
  • the first device is different from the source node
  • the sensing mode switching device 300 also includes:
  • a first sending module configured to send a first measurement request to the source node, where the first measurement request is used to request the source node to use the first sensing method to perform the first sensing measurement on the sensing target.
  • the acquisition module 301 is specifically used for:
  • a first measurement report sent by the source node is received, the first measurement report being generated by the source node based on the first sensing measurement.
  • the first sending module is specifically used for:
  • the target event includes at least one of the following:
  • the position of the source node changes
  • the environment of the sensing area where the sensing target is located changes
  • the sensing resources available to the source node change
  • the measured value of the sensing measurement quantity of the source node reaches the first preset threshold
  • the measured value of the communication measurement quantity of the source node reaches the second preset threshold.
  • the sensing mode switching device 300 also includes:
  • the second sending module is configured to send first measurement configuration information to the source node, where the first measurement configuration information is used by the source node to perform the first sensing measurement.
  • the first measurement configuration information is included in the first measurement request.
  • the first device is the same as the source node;
  • the sensing mode switching device 300 also includes:
  • the third sending module is configured to send the first measurement report to a second device, where the second device includes a core network node or a network side device accessed by the source node.
  • the first device is the same as the source node;
  • the acquisition module 301 is specifically used for:
  • the target event includes at least one of the following:
  • the state of the sensing target changes
  • the position of the source node changes
  • the environment of the sensing area where the sensing target is located changes
  • the sensing resources available to the source node change
  • the measured value of the sensing measurement quantity of the source node reaches the third preset threshold
  • the measured value of the communication measurement quantity of the source node reaches a fourth preset threshold.
  • the sensing mode switching device 300 also includes:
  • the fourth sending module is configured to send a first request message to the N first candidate nodes when it is determined that the sensing mode of the sensing target is switched from the first sensing mode to the second sensing mode,
  • the first request message is used to request at least one target candidate node to use the second sensing method to perform sensing measurements on the sensing target, and N is an integer greater than or equal to 1;
  • the feedback message includes at least one of the following:
  • a first feedback message determined by the first candidate node according to the first request message, is used to indicate whether the first candidate node agrees to use the second sensing method to perform sensing measurement on the sensing target, the
  • the target candidate node includes the first candidate node;
  • the second feedback message is determined by the second candidate node according to the second request message sent by the first candidate node, and is used to indicate whether the second candidate node agrees to use the second sensing method to sense the sensing target.
  • the second request message is used to request the second candidate node to use the second sensing mode to perform sensing measurement on the sensing target, and the target candidate node includes the second candidate node.
  • the sensing mode switching device 300 also includes:
  • the fifth sending module is configured to send a first indication message to a second device.
  • the second device includes a core network node, a source node, or a source access base station of the source node.
  • the first indication message is used to indicate the pair of The sensing mode of the sensing target is switched from the first sensing mode to the second sensing mode.
  • the sensing mode switching device 300 also includes:
  • a second determination module configured to determine the interaction type of the second sensing mode when it is determined that the sensing mode of the sensing target is switched from the first sensing mode to the second sensing mode
  • the first device sends a first request message to the N first candidate nodes, including:
  • the first device sends a first request message to the N first candidate nodes according to the interaction type of the second sensing mode
  • interaction type of the second perception mode includes any of the following:
  • the signal sending node and the signal receiving node in the second sensing mode are two different network side devices
  • one of the signal sending node and the signal receiving node in the second sensing mode is a network side device, and the other is a terminal;
  • the signal sending node and the signal receiving node in the second sensing mode are two different terminals.
  • the sensing mode switching device 300 determines the N first candidate nodes according to at least one of the following:
  • the feedback message is used to indicate that the target candidate node agrees to adopt the second sensing mode for all
  • the feedback message further includes first parameter configuration information
  • the first parameter configuration information is used to indicate the sensing parameter configuration information of the target candidate node performing sensing measurement on the sensing target.
  • the sensing mode switching device 300 also includes:
  • the third determination module is configured to, when the feedback message is used to indicate that the target candidate node agrees to use the second sensing method to perform sensing measurement on the sensing target, based on the feedback message, from the target Determine M target nodes among the candidate nodes, where M is an integer greater than or equal to 1;
  • a sixth sending module configured to send a first notification message to the M target nodes, where the first notification message is used to instruct the M target nodes to use the second sensing mode to perform sensing measurements on the sensing target.
  • the first notification message includes second parameter configuration information, and the second parameter configuration information is used to instruct the target node to perform sensing measurement on the sensing target.
  • the first device is the same as the source node;
  • One of the M target nodes is the source node, or none of the M target nodes is the source node.
  • the sensing mode switching device 300 also includes:
  • the seventh sending module is used to send first information to the M target nodes, where the first information includes at least one of the following:
  • the sensing mode switching device 300 further includes:
  • An eighth sending module is configured to send a second notification message to the source node, where the second notification message is used to instruct the source node to stop using the first sensing mode to perform sensing measurements on the sensing target.
  • the eighth sending module is specifically used for:
  • the second notification message is sent to the source node, and the third notification message is used to instruct the target node to adopt the second sensing mode to perform sensing on the sensing target.
  • At least one perceptual measurement is performed, and a measurement value of at least one perceptual measurement quantity or at least one perceptual result is obtained.
  • the first device is the same as the source node, and the sensing mode switching device 300 further includes:
  • a control module configured to control the first device to stop using the first sensing mode to perform sensing measurements on the sensing target.
  • control module is specifically used for:
  • the fourth notification message is used to instruct the target node to use the
  • the second sensing method performs at least one sensing measurement on the sensing target and obtains a measurement value of at least one sensing measurement quantity or at least A perceived result.
  • the first measurement report includes at least one of the following:
  • First indication information used to indicate whether a preset event occurs.
  • the preset event is used to trigger the switching of the sensing mode of the sensing target from the first sensing mode to the second sensing mode;
  • the second indication information is used to indicate whether the preset switching condition is satisfied.
  • the preset switching condition is used to trigger the switching of the sensing mode of the sensing target from the first sensing mode to the second sensing mode.
  • the sensing node adopts the first sensing mode to perform sensing measurement on the sensing target
  • the sensing measurement can be performed in an appropriate sensing mode. to improve the reliability of perceptual measurements.
  • the sensing mode switching device 300 in the embodiment of the present application may be an electronic device, such as an electronic device with an operating system, or may be a component in the electronic device, such as an integrated circuit or chip.
  • the electronic device may be a terminal or a network side device.
  • the terminal may include, but is not limited to, the types of terminal 11 listed above
  • the network side device may include, but is not limited to, the type of network side device 12 listed above, which are not specifically limited in this embodiment of the application.
  • the sensing mode switching device 300 provided by the embodiment of the present application can implement each process implemented by the method embodiment in Figure 2 and achieve the same technical effect. To avoid duplication, the details will not be described here.
  • FIG. 4 shows a flow chart of a sensing mode switching method provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 4, the sensing mode switching method includes the following steps:
  • Step 401 When initiating switching of the sensing mode of the sensing target from the first sensing mode to the second sensing mode, the first node receives a first request message sent by the first device, where the first request message is used to request at least A target candidate node uses a second sensing mode to perform sensing measurements on the sensing target.
  • the signal sending node and the signal receiving node in the first sensing mode are the same node.
  • the signal sending node in the second sensing mode and the signal receiving node in the second sensing mode are the same node.
  • the signal receiving nodes of the two sensing modes are different nodes;
  • Step 402 The first node sends a feedback message to the first device, where the feedback message is used to indicate whether the target candidate node agrees to use the second sensing mode to perform sensing measurement on the sensing target.
  • the first node in the embodiment of the present application may be a candidate node or a source node, and the first node may include a network-side device or a terminal.
  • the feedback message includes at least one of the following:
  • a first feedback message, determined by the first node according to the first request message, is used to indicate whether the first node agrees to use the second sensing method to perform sensing measurement on the sensing target.
  • the target candidate Nodes include the first node;
  • the second feedback message is determined by the second node according to the second request message sent by the first node, and is used to indicate whether the second node agrees to use the second sensing method to perform sensing measurement on the sensing target, so
  • the second request message is used to request the second node to use the second sensing mode to perform sensing measurement on the sensing target, and the target candidate node includes the second node.
  • the first request message further includes indication information indicating the interaction type of the second sensing mode
  • the method further includes:
  • the first node sends the second request message to the second node according to the interaction type of the second sensing mode
  • interaction type of the second perception mode includes any of the following:
  • the signal sending node and the signal receiving node in the second sensing mode are two different network side devices
  • one of the signal sending node and the signal receiving node in the second sensing mode is a network side device, and the other is a terminal;
  • the signal sending node and the signal receiving node in the second sensing mode are two different terminals.
  • the feedback message in the case where the feedback message is used to indicate that the target candidate node agrees to use the second sensing method to perform sensing measurement on the sensing target, the feedback message also includes first parameter configuration information, so The first parameter configuration information is used to instruct the target candidate node to perform sensing measurement on the sensing target.
  • the target candidate node includes the first node
  • the method further includes:
  • the first node receives a first notification message sent by the first device, where the first notification message is used to instruct the first node to use the second sensing mode to perform sensing measurement on the sensing target;
  • the first node uses the second sensing mode to perform sensing measurement on the sensing target.
  • the first notification message includes second parameter configuration information, and the second parameter configuration information is used to instruct the first node to perform sensing measurement on the sensing target.
  • the method also includes:
  • the first node receives the first information sent by the first device, and the first information includes at least one of the following:
  • the source node s historical sensing results for the sensing target
  • the method also includes:
  • the first node sends a third notification message to the first device, where the third notification message is used to indicate that the first node has performed at least one sensing measurement on the sensing target using the second sensing mode, and get at least one A measurement of a perceptual measurement quantity or at least a perceptual result.
  • the sensing node adopts the first sensing mode to perform sensing measurement on the sensing target
  • the sensing measurement can be performed in an appropriate sensing mode. to improve the reliability of perceptual measurements.
  • the execution subject may be a sensing mode switching device.
  • a sensing mode switching device performing a sensing mode switching method is used as an example to illustrate the device for switching the sensing mode provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • an embodiment of the present application also provides a sensing mode switching device, which can be applied to the first node.
  • the sensing mode switching device 500 includes:
  • the first receiving module 501 is configured to receive a first request message sent by the first device when the sensing mode of the sensing target is switched from the first sensing mode to the second sensing mode.
  • the first request message is used to Requesting at least one target candidate node to use a second sensing mode to perform sensing measurements on the sensing target, where the signal sending node of the first sensing mode and the signal receiving node of the first sensing mode are the same node, and the second sensing mode
  • the signal sending node of the mode and the signal receiving node of the second sensing mode are different nodes;
  • the first sending module 502 is configured to send a feedback message to the first device, where the feedback message is used to indicate whether the target candidate node agrees to use the second sensing mode to perform sensing measurement on the sensing target.
  • the feedback message includes at least one of the following:
  • a first feedback message, determined by the first node according to the first request message, is used to indicate whether the first node agrees to use the second sensing method to perform sensing measurement on the sensing target.
  • the target candidate Nodes include the first node;
  • the second feedback message is determined by the second node according to the second request message sent by the first node, and is used to indicate whether the second node agrees to use the second sensing method to perform sensing measurement on the sensing target, so
  • the second request message is used to request the second node to use the second sensing mode to perform sensing measurement on the sensing target, and the target candidate node includes the second node.
  • the first request message further includes indication information indicating the interaction type of the second sensing mode
  • the sensing mode switching device 500 also includes:
  • a second sending module configured to send the second request message to the second node according to the interaction type of the second sensing mode
  • interaction type of the second perception mode includes any of the following:
  • the signal sending node and the signal receiving node in the second sensing mode are two different network side devices
  • one of the signal sending node and the signal receiving node in the second sensing mode is a network side device, and the other is a terminal;
  • the signal sending node and the signal receiving node in the second sensing mode are two different terminals.
  • the feedback message is used to indicate that the target candidate node agrees to adopt the second sensing mode for all
  • the feedback message further includes first parameter configuration information
  • the first parameter configuration information is used to indicate the sensing parameter configuration information of the target candidate node performing sensing measurement on the sensing target.
  • the target candidate node includes the first node
  • the sensing mode switching device 500 also includes:
  • the second receiving module is configured to receive the first message sent by the first device when the feedback message is used to indicate that the first node agrees to use the second sensing method to perform sensing measurement on the sensing target.
  • Notification message the first notification message is used to instruct the first node to use the second sensing mode to perform sensing measurement on the sensing target;
  • a sensing module configured to perform sensing measurement on the sensing target using the second sensing method.
  • the first notification message includes second parameter configuration information, and the second parameter configuration information is used to instruct the first node to perform sensing measurement on the sensing target.
  • the sensing mode switching device 500 also includes:
  • a third receiving module configured to receive the first information sent by the first device, where the first information includes at least one of the following:
  • the source node s historical sensing results for the sensing target
  • the sensing mode switching device 500 also includes:
  • a third sending module configured to send a third notification message to the first device, where the third notification message is used to indicate that the first node has used the second sensing method to sense the sensing target at least once. Measure, and obtain a measurement value of at least one perceptual measurement quantity or at least one perceptual result.
  • the sensing node adopts the first sensing mode to perform sensing measurement on the sensing target
  • the sensing measurement can be performed in an appropriate sensing mode. to improve the reliability of perceptual measurements.
  • the sensing mode switching device 500 in the embodiment of the present application may be an electronic device, such as an electronic device with an operating system, or may be a component in the electronic device, such as an integrated circuit or chip.
  • the electronic device may be a terminal or a network side device.
  • the terminal may include, but is not limited to, the types of terminal 11 listed above
  • the network side device may include, but is not limited to, the type of network side device 12 listed above, which are not specifically limited in this embodiment of the application.
  • the sensing mode switching device 500 provided by the embodiment of the present application can implement each process implemented by the method embodiment in Figure 4 and achieve the same technical effect. To avoid duplication, the details will not be described here.
  • this embodiment of the present application also provides a communication device 600, which includes a processor 601 and a memory 602.
  • the memory 602 stores programs or instructions that can be run on the processor 601, such as , the communication
  • the device 600 is a terminal, when the program or instruction is executed by the processor 601, each step of the above sensing mode switching method embodiment is implemented, and the same technical effect can be achieved.
  • the communication device 600 is a network-side device, when the program or instruction is executed by the processor 601, the steps of the above sensing mode switching method embodiment are implemented, and the same technical effect can be achieved. To avoid duplication, they will not be described again here.
  • An embodiment of the present application also provides a communication device, which is a terminal or a network side device.
  • the communication device includes a processor and a communication interface, wherein the communication interface is used to obtain a first measurement report, and the first measurement report is provided by
  • the source node uses the first sensing mode to perform first sensing measurement on the sensing target.
  • the signal sending node of the first sensing mode and the signal receiving node of the first sensing mode are the same node.
  • the first device and the first sensing mode are generated by the source node.
  • the source nodes are the same or different; the processor is configured to determine whether to initiate switching of the sensing mode of the sensing target from the first sensing mode to the second sensing mode according to the first measurement report, and the second sensing mode
  • the signal sending node and the signal receiving node of the second sensing mode are different nodes.
  • An embodiment of the present application also provides a communication device.
  • the communication device is a terminal or a network side device.
  • the communication device includes a processor and a communication interface, wherein the communication interface is used to initiate the sensing mode of the sensing target by the first sensing mode.
  • the first request message is used to request at least one target candidate node to use the second sensing mode to perform sensing measurements on the sensing target, so
  • the signal sending node of the first sensing mode and the signal receiving node of the first sensing mode are the same node, and the signal sending node of the second sensing mode and the signal receiving node of the second sensing mode are different nodes;
  • the communication interface is also used to send a feedback message to the first device, where the feedback message is used to indicate whether the target candidate node agrees to use the second sensing mode to perform sensing measurement on the sensing target.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of the hardware structure of a terminal that implements an embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal 700 includes but is not limited to: a radio frequency unit 701, a network module 702, an audio output unit 703, an input unit 704, a sensor 705, a display unit 706, a user input unit 707, an interface unit 708, a memory 709, a processor 710, etc. At least some parts.
  • the terminal 700 may also include a power supply (such as a battery) that supplies power to various components.
  • the power supply may be logically connected to the processor 710 through a power management system, thereby managing charging, discharging, and power consumption through the power management system. Management and other functions.
  • the terminal structure shown in FIG. 7 does not constitute a limitation on the terminal.
  • the terminal may include more or fewer components than shown in the figure, or some components may be combined or arranged differently, which will not be described again here.
  • the input unit 704 may include a graphics processing unit (GPU) 7041 and a microphone 7042.
  • the graphics processor 7041 is responsible for the image capture device (GPU) in the video capture mode or the image capture mode. Process the image data of still pictures or videos obtained by cameras (such as cameras).
  • the display unit 706 may include a display panel 7061, which may be configured in the form of a liquid crystal display, an organic light emitting diode, or the like.
  • the user input unit 707 includes a touch panel 7071 and at least one of other input devices 7072 . Touch panel 7071, also called touch screen.
  • the touch panel 7071 may include two parts: a touch detection device and a touch controller.
  • Other input devices 7072 may include, but are not limited to, physical keyboards, function keys (such as volume control keys, Switch buttons, etc.), trackball, mouse, joystick, etc., which will not be described in detail here.
  • the radio frequency unit 701 after receiving downlink data from the network side device, can transmit it to the processor 710 for processing; in addition, the radio frequency unit 701 can send uplink data to the network side device.
  • the radio frequency unit 701 includes, but is not limited to, an antenna, amplifier, transceiver, coupler, low noise amplifier, duplexer, etc.
  • Memory 709 may be used to store software programs or instructions as well as various data.
  • the memory 709 may mainly include a first storage area for storing programs or instructions and a second storage area for storing data, wherein the first storage area may store an operating system, an application program or instructions required for at least one function (such as a sound playback function, Image playback function, etc.) etc.
  • memory 709 may include volatile memory or non-volatile memory, or memory 709 may include both volatile and non-volatile memory.
  • non-volatile memory can be read-only memory (Read-Only Memory, ROM), programmable read-only memory (Programmable ROM, PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (Erasable PROM, EPROM), electrically removable memory. Erase programmable read-only memory (Electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory.
  • Volatile memory can be random access memory (Random Access Memory, RAM), static random access memory (Static RAM, SRAM), dynamic random access memory (Dynamic RAM, DRAM), synchronous dynamic random access memory (Synchronous DRAM, SDRAM), double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory (Double Data Rate SDRAM, DDRSDRAM), enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory (Enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM), synchronous link dynamic random access memory (Synch link DRAM) , SLDRAM) and direct memory bus random access memory (Direct Rambus RAM, DRRAM).
  • RAM Random Access Memory
  • SRAM static random access memory
  • DRAM dynamic random access memory
  • DRAM synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • SDRAM double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • Double Data Rate SDRAM Double Data Rate SDRAM
  • DDRSDRAM double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • Enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • Synch link DRAM synchronous link dynamic random access memory
  • SLDRAM direct memory bus
  • the processor 710 may include one or more processing units; optionally, the processor 710 integrates an application processor and a modem processor, where the application processor mainly handles operations related to the operating system, user interface, application programs, etc., Modem processors mainly process wireless communication signals, such as baseband processors. It can be understood that the above-mentioned modem processor may not be integrated into the processor 710.
  • the terminal 700 can serve as a first device to perform the steps of the sensing mode switching method in the embodiment of the present application, and can also serve as the first node to perform the steps of the sensing mode switching method in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal 700 can serve as the first device to perform the following steps:
  • the radio frequency unit 701 is configured to: obtain a first measurement report, the first measurement report is generated by the source node using a first sensing mode to perform a first sensing measurement on the sensing target, the signal sending node in the first sensing mode and the The signal receiving node in the first sensing mode is the same node;
  • the processor 710 is configured to: determine, according to the first measurement report, whether to initiate switching of the sensing mode of the sensing target from the first sensing mode to the second sensing mode, the signal sending node of the second sensing mode and The signal receiving nodes in the second sensing mode are different nodes.
  • terminal 700 is not the source node
  • RF unit 701 is also used for:
  • a first measurement report sent by the source node is received, the first measurement report being generated by the source node based on the first sensing measurement.
  • the radio frequency unit 701 is also used for:
  • the target event includes at least one of the following:
  • the state of the sensing target changes
  • the position of the source node changes
  • the environment of the sensing area where the sensing target is located changes
  • the sensing resources available to the source node change
  • the measured value of the sensing measurement quantity of the source node reaches the first preset threshold
  • the measured value of the communication measurement quantity of the source node reaches the second preset threshold.
  • the radio frequency unit 701 is also used for:
  • the first measurement configuration information is included in the first measurement request.
  • terminal 700 is the source node
  • RF unit 701 is also used for:
  • terminal 700 is the source node
  • RF unit 701 is also used for:
  • the first device determines that the target event occurs, obtain the first measurement report
  • the target event includes at least one of the following:
  • the state of the sensing target changes
  • the position of the source node changes
  • the environment of the sensing area where the sensing target is located changes
  • the sensing resources available to the source node change
  • the measured value of the sensing measurement quantity of the source node reaches the third preset threshold
  • the measured value of the communication measurement quantity of the source node reaches a fourth preset threshold.
  • the radio frequency unit 701 is also used for:
  • a first request message is sent to the N first candidate nodes, and the first request message is To request at least one target candidate node to use the second sensing method to perform sensing measurement on the sensing target, N is an integer greater than or equal to 1;
  • the information is used to indicate whether the target candidate node agrees to use the second sensing mode to perform sensing measurement on the sensing target.
  • the feedback message includes at least one of the following:
  • a first feedback message determined by the first candidate node according to the first request message, is used to indicate whether the first candidate node agrees to use the second sensing method to perform sensing measurement on the sensing target, the
  • the target candidate node includes the first candidate node;
  • the second feedback message is determined by the second candidate node according to the second request message sent by the first candidate node, and is used to indicate whether the second candidate node agrees to use the second sensing method to sense the sensing target.
  • the second request message is used to request the second candidate node to use the second sensing mode to perform sensing measurement on the sensing target, and the target candidate node includes the second candidate node.
  • the radio frequency unit 701 is also used for:
  • the first device sends a first indication message to a second device, the second device includes a core network node, a source node, or a source access base station of the source node, and the first indication message is used to indicate that the The sensing mode of the sensing target is switched from the first sensing mode to the second sensing mode.
  • processor 710 is also used to:
  • RF unit 701 is also used for:
  • interaction type of the second perception mode includes any of the following:
  • the signal sending node and the signal receiving node in the second sensing mode are two different network side devices
  • one of the signal sending node and the signal receiving node in the second sensing mode is a network side device, and the other is a terminal;
  • the signal sending node and the signal receiving node in the second sensing mode are two different terminals.
  • processor 710 is also used to:
  • the N first candidate nodes are determined according to at least one of the following:
  • the feedback message in the case where the feedback message is used to indicate that the target candidate node agrees to use the second sensing method to perform sensing measurement on the sensing target, the feedback message also includes first parameter configuration information, so The first reference The parameter configuration information is used to indicate the sensing parameter configuration information of the target candidate node to perform sensing measurement on the sensing target.
  • processor 710 is also used to:
  • M targets are determined from the target candidate node according to the feedback message Node, M is an integer greater than or equal to 1;
  • RF unit 701 is also used for:
  • a first notification message is sent to the M target nodes, where the first notification message is used to instruct the M target nodes to use the second sensing mode to perform sensing measurements on the sensing target.
  • the first notification message includes second parameter configuration information, and the second parameter configuration information is used to instruct the target node to perform sensing measurement on the sensing target.
  • terminal 700 is the source node
  • the M target nodes include the terminal 700, or the M target nodes do not include the terminal 700.
  • the radio frequency unit 701 is also used for:
  • the terminal 700 is not the source node, and the radio frequency unit 701 is also used for:
  • the radio frequency unit 701 is also used for:
  • the second notification message is sent to the source node, and the third notification message is used to instruct the target node to adopt the second sensing mode to perform sensing on the sensing target.
  • At least one perceptual measurement is performed, and a measurement value of at least one perceptual measurement quantity or at least one perceptual result is obtained.
  • the terminal 700 is the source node, and the processor 710 is also used to:
  • processor 710 is also used to:
  • the fourth notification message When receiving a fourth notification message, stop using the first sensing mode to perform sensing measurements on the sensing target.
  • the fourth notification message is used to instruct the target node to use the second sensing mode to perform sensing measurements on the sensing target.
  • the perception target has performed at least one perception measurement and obtained a measurement value of at least one perception measurement quantity or at least one perception result.
  • the first measurement report includes at least one of the following:
  • First indication information used to indicate whether a preset event occurs.
  • the preset event is used to trigger the switching of the sensing mode of the sensing target from the first sensing mode to the second sensing mode;
  • the second indication information is used to indicate whether the preset switching condition is satisfied.
  • the preset switching condition is used to trigger the switching of the sensing mode of the sensing target from the first sensing mode to the second sensing mode.
  • the terminal 700 can serve as the first node to perform the following steps:
  • Radio frequency unit 701 is used for:
  • the first device When initiating a switching of the sensing mode of the sensing target from the first sensing mode to the second sensing mode, receiving a first request message sent by the first device, where the first request message is used to request at least one target candidate node to adopt the first sensing mode.
  • Two sensing modes perform sensing measurements on the sensing target.
  • the signal sending node of the first sensing mode and the signal receiving node of the first sensing mode are the same node.
  • the signal sending node of the second sensing mode and the signal receiving node of the second sensing mode are the same node.
  • the signal receiving nodes in the second sensing mode are different nodes;
  • the feedback message includes at least one of the following:
  • a first feedback message, determined by the first node according to the first request message, is used to indicate whether the first node agrees to use the second sensing method to perform sensing measurement on the sensing target.
  • the target candidate Nodes include the first node;
  • the second feedback message is determined by the second node according to the second request message sent by the first node, and is used to indicate whether the second node agrees to use the second sensing method to perform sensing measurement on the sensing target, so
  • the second request message is used to request the second node to use the second sensing mode to perform sensing measurement on the sensing target, and the target candidate node includes the second node.
  • the first request message further includes indication information indicating the interaction type of the second sensing mode
  • RF unit 701 is also used for:
  • interaction type of the second perception mode includes any of the following:
  • the signal sending node and the signal receiving node in the second sensing mode are two different network side devices
  • one of the signal sending node and the signal receiving node in the second sensing mode is a network side device, and the other is a terminal;
  • the signal sending node and the signal receiving node in the second sensing mode are two different terminals.
  • the feedback message in the case where the feedback message is used to indicate that the target candidate node agrees to use the second sensing method to perform sensing measurement on the sensing target, the feedback message also includes first parameter configuration information, so The first parameter configuration information is used to instruct the target candidate node to perform sensing measurement on the sensing target. interest.
  • the target candidate node includes the first node
  • RF unit 701 is also used for:
  • the feedback message is used to indicate that the first node agrees to use the second sensing mode to perform sensing measurement on the sensing target
  • the first notification message is used to instruct the first node to use the second sensing mode to perform sensing measurement on the sensing target
  • the second sensing mode is used to perform sensing measurement on the sensing target.
  • the first notification message includes second parameter configuration information, and the second parameter configuration information is used to instruct the first node to perform sensing measurement on the sensing target.
  • the radio frequency unit 701 is also used for:
  • the source node s historical sensing results for the sensing target
  • the radio frequency unit 701 is also used for:
  • the sensing node adopts the first sensing mode to perform sensing measurement on the sensing target
  • the sensing measurement can be performed in an appropriate sensing mode. to improve the reliability of perceptual measurements.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of the hardware structure of a network-side device that implements an embodiment of the present application.
  • the network side device 80 includes: an antenna 81 , a radio frequency device 82 , a baseband device 83 , a processor 84 and a memory 85 .
  • the antenna 81 is connected to the radio frequency device 82 .
  • the radio frequency device 82 receives information through the antenna 81 and sends the received information to the baseband device 83 for processing.
  • the baseband device 83 processes the information to be sent and sends it to the radio frequency device 82.
  • the radio frequency device 82 processes the received information and then sends it out through the antenna 81.
  • the method performed by the network side device in the above embodiment can be implemented in the baseband device 83, which includes a baseband processor.
  • the baseband device 83 may include, for example, at least one baseband board on which multiple chips are disposed, as shown in FIG. Program to perform the network device operations shown in the above method embodiments.
  • the network side device may also include a network interface 86, which is, for example, a common public wireless interface. public radio interface (CPRI).
  • a network interface 86 which is, for example, a common public wireless interface. public radio interface (CPRI).
  • CPRI public radio interface
  • the network side device 80 in the embodiment of the present application also includes: instructions or programs stored in the memory 85 and executable on the processor 84.
  • the processor 84 calls the instructions or programs in the memory 85 to execute Figure 3 or Figure 5
  • the execution methods of each module are shown and achieve the same technical effect. To avoid repetition, they will not be described in detail here.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a network side device.
  • the network side device 900 includes: a processor 901, a network interface 902, and a memory 903.
  • the network interface 902 is, for example, a common public radio interface (CPRI).
  • CPRI common public radio interface
  • the network side device 900 in the embodiment of the present application also includes: instructions or programs stored in the memory 903 and executable on the processor 901.
  • the processor 901 calls the instructions or programs in the memory 903 to execute Figure 3 or Figure 5
  • the execution methods of each module are shown and achieve the same technical effect. To avoid repetition, they will not be described in detail here.
  • Embodiments of the present application also provide a readable storage medium.
  • Programs or instructions are stored on the readable storage medium.
  • the program or instructions are executed by a processor, each process of the above sensing mode switching method embodiment is implemented, and can achieve The same technical effects are not repeated here to avoid repetition.
  • the processor is the processor in the terminal described in the above embodiment.
  • the readable storage medium includes computer readable storage media, such as computer read-only memory ROM, random access memory RAM, magnetic disk or optical disk, etc.
  • An embodiment of the present application further provides a chip.
  • the chip includes a processor and a communication interface.
  • the communication interface is coupled to the processor.
  • the processor is used to run programs or instructions to implement the above embodiment of the sensing mode switching method. Each process can achieve the same technical effect. To avoid repetition, we will not go into details here.
  • chips mentioned in the embodiments of this application may also be called system-on-chip, system-on-a-chip, system-on-chip or system-on-chip, etc.
  • Embodiments of the present application further provide a computer program/program product.
  • the computer program/program product is stored in a storage medium.
  • the computer program/program product is executed by at least one processor to implement the above sensing mode switching method.
  • Each process in the example can achieve the same technical effect. To avoid repetition, we will not repeat it here.
  • Embodiments of the present application also provide a communication system, including: a terminal and a network side device.
  • the terminal can be used to perform the steps of the sensing mode switching method as described above.
  • the network side device can be used to perform the sensing mode as described above. Steps for switching methods.
  • the methods of the above embodiments can be implemented by means of software plus the necessary general hardware platform. Of course, it can also be implemented by hardware, but in many cases the former is better. implementation.
  • the technical solution of the present application can be embodied in the form of a computer software product that is essentially or contributes to related technologies.
  • the computer software product is stored in a storage medium (such as ROM/RAM, disk, CD), including several instructions to cause a terminal (which can be a mobile phone, computer, server, air conditioner, or network device, etc.) to execute the methods described in various embodiments of this application.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

本申请公开了一种感知方式切换方法、装置、通信设备及存储介质，属于通信技术领域，本申请实施例的感知方式切换方法包括：第一设备获取第一测量报告，所述第一测量报告由源节点采用第一感知方式对感知目标进行第一感知测量而生成，所述第一感知方式的信号发送节点和所述第一感知方式信号接收节点为同一节点，所述第一设备与所述源节点相同或不同；所述第一设备根据所述第一测量报告，确定是否发起对所述感知目标的感知方式由所述第一感知方式切换为第二感知方式，所述第二感知方式的信号发送节点和所述第二感知方式的信号接收节点为不同节点。

Description

感知方式切换方法、装置、通信设备及存储介质
相关申请的交叉引用
本申请主张在2022年05月30日在中国提交的中国专利申请No.202210605844.3的优先权，其全部内容通过引用包含于此。
技术领域
本申请属于通信感知技术领域，具体涉及一种感知方式切换方法、装置、通信设备及存储介质。
背景技术
在相关技术中，移动通信网络中的感知节点通常采用某种预先确定或预先配置的感知方式对感知目标(例如：特定的实体目标或特定的区域)进行感知测量，在某些情况下(例如：感知物体的状态发生变化，感知区域的环境发生改变，或者，感知节点的状态发生变化)，感知节点可能无法对感知目标进行准确的感知测量，这将导致感知测量的可靠性较差。
发明内容
本申请实施例提供一种感知方式切换方法、装置、通信设备及存储介质，能够解决感知测量可靠性较差的问题。
第一方面，提供了一种感知方式切换方法，该方法包括：
第一设备获取第一测量报告，所述第一测量报告由源节点采用第一感知方式对感知目标进行第一感知测量而生成，所述第一感知方式的信号发送节点和所述第一感知方式的信号接收节点为同一节点，所述第一设备与所述源节点相同或不同；
所述第一设备根据所述第一测量报告，确定是否发起对所述感知目标的感知方式由所述第一感知方式切换为第二感知方式，所述第二感知方式的信号发送节点和所述第二感知方式的信号接收节点为不同节点。
第二方面，提供了一种感知方式切换装置，应用于第一设备，该装置包括：
获取模块，用于获取第一测量报告，所述第一测量报告由源节点采用第一感知方式对感知目标进行第一感知测量而生成，所述第一感知方式的信号发送节点和所述第一感知方式的信号接收节点为同一节点，所述第一设备与所述源节点相同或不同；
第一确定模块，用于根据所述第一测量报告，确定是否发起对所述感知目标的感知方式由所述第一感知方式切换为第二感知方式，所述第二感知方式的信号发送节点和所述第 二感知方式的信号接收节点为不同节点。
第三方面，提供了一种感知方式切换方法，该方法包括：
在发起对感知目标的感知方式由第一感知方式切换为第二感知方式的情况下，第一节点接收第一设备发送的第一请求消息，所述第一请求消息用于请求至少一个目标候选节点采用第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量，所述第一感知方式的信号发送节点和所述第一感知方式的信号接收节点为同一节点，所述第二感知方式的信号发送节点和所述第二感知方式的信号接收节点为不同节点；
所述第一节点向所述第一设备发送反馈消息，所述反馈消息用于指示所述目标候选节点是否同意采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量。
第四方面，提供了一种感知方式切换装置，应用于第一节点，该装置包括：
第一接收模块，用于在发起对感知目标的感知方式由第一感知方式切换为第二感知方式的情况下，接收第一设备发送的第一请求消息，所述第一请求消息用于请求至少一个目标候选节点采用第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量，所述第一感知方式的信号发送节点和所述第一感知方式的信号接收节点为同一节点，所述第二感知方式的信号发送节点和所述第二感知方式的信号接收节点为不同节点；
第一发送模块，用于向所述第一设备发送反馈消息，所述反馈消息用于指示所述目标候选节点是否同意采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量。
第五方面，提供了一种终端，该终端包括处理器和存储器，所述存储器存储可在所述处理器上运行的程序或指令，所述程序或指令被所述处理器执行时实现如第一方面所述的方法的步骤，或者实现如第三方面所述的方法的步骤。
第六方面，提供了一种网络侧设备，该网络侧设备包括处理器和存储器，所述存储器存储可在所述处理器上运行的程序或指令，所述程序或指令被所述处理器执行时实现如第一方面所述的方法的步骤，或者实现如第三方面所述的方法的步骤。
第七方面，提供了一种通信设备，所述通信设备为终端或网络侧设备，所述通信设备包括处理器及通信接口，其中，所述通信接口用于获取第一测量报告，所述第一测量报告由源节点采用第一感知方式对感知目标进行第一感知测量而生成，所述第一感知方式的信号发送节点和所述第一感知方式的信号接收节点为同一节点，所述第一设备与所述源节点相同或不同；所述处理器还用于根据所述第一测量报告，确定是否发起对所述感知目标的感知方式由所述第一感知方式切换为第二感知方式，所述第二感知方式的信号发送节点和所述第二感知方式的信号接收节点为不同节点。
第八方面，提供了一种通信设备，所述通信设备为终端或网络侧设备，所述通信设备包括处理器及通信接口，其中，所述通信接口用于在发起对感知目标的感知方式由第一感知方式切换为第二感知方式的情况下，接收第一设备发送的第一请求消息，所述第一请求消息用于请求至少一个目标候选节点采用第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量，所述第一感知方式的信号发送节点和所述第一感知方式的信号接收节点为同一节点，所述第 二感知方式的信号发送节点和所述第二感知方式的信号接收节点为不同节点；所述通信接口还用于向所述第一设备发送反馈消息，所述反馈消息用于指示所述目标候选节点是否同意采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量。
第九方面，提供了一种通信系统，包括：终端及网络侧设备，所述终端可用于执行如第一方面所述的感知方式切换方法的步骤，或者执行如第三方面所述的感知方式切换方法的步骤；所述网络侧设备可用于执行如第一方面所述的感知方式切换方法的步骤，或者执行如第三方面所述的感知方式切换方法的步骤。
第十方面，提供了一种可读存储介质，所述可读存储介质上存储程序或指令，所述程序或指令被处理器执行时实现如第一方面所述的方法的步骤，或者实现如第三方面所述的方法的步骤。
第十一方面，提供了一种芯片，所述芯片包括处理器和通信接口，所述通信接口和所述处理器耦合，所述处理器用于运行程序或指令，实现如第一方面所述的方法的步骤，或者实现如第三方面所述的方法的步骤。
第十二方面，提供了一种计算机程序/程序产品，所述计算机程序/程序产品被存储在存储介质中，所述计算机程序/程序产品被至少一个处理器执行以实现如第一方面所述的方法的步骤，或者实现如第三方面所述的方法的步骤。
在本申请实施例中，在感知节点采用第一感知方式对感知目标进行感知测量的场景下，根据感知节点的测量报告来确定是否发起对感知目标的感知方式由第一感知方式切换到第二感知方式。由于感知测量所采用的感知方式可切换，这使得感知测量能够以合适的感知方式进行，从而能够提高感知测量的可靠性。
附图说明
图1是本申请实施例可应用的网络结构示意图；
图2是本申请实施例提供的一种感知方式切换处理方法的流程图之一；
图2a是第一感知方式切换为第二感知方式的示意图；
图2b是第二感知方式切换为第一感知方式的示意图；
图2c是第一感知方式切换为第二感知方式的多种组合的示意图；
图3是本申请实施例提供的一种感知方式切换处理装置的结构图之一；
图4是本申请实施例提供的一种感知方式切换处理方法的流程图之二；
图5是本申请实施例提供的一种感知方式切换处理装置的结构图之二；
图6是本申请实施例提供的一种通信设备的结构图；
图7是本申请实施例提供的一种终端的结构图；
图8是本申请实施例提供的一种网络侧设备的结构图；
图9是本申请实施例提供的另一种网络侧设备的结构图。
具体实施方式
下面将结合本申请实施例中的附图，对本申请实施例中的技术方案进行清楚描述，显然，所描述的实施例是本申请一部分实施例，而不是全部的实施例。基于本申请中的实施例，本领域普通技术人员所获得的所有其他实施例，都属于本申请保护的范围。
本申请的说明书和权利要求书中的术语“第一”、“第二”等是用于区别类似的对象，而不用于描述特定的顺序或先后次序。应该理解这样使用的术语在适当情况下可以互换，以便本申请的实施例能够以除了在这里图示或描述的那些以外的顺序实施，且“第一”、“第二”所区别的对象通常为一类，并不限定对象的个数，例如第一对象可以是一个，也可以是多个。此外，说明书以及权利要求中“和/或”表示所连接对象的至少其中之一，字符“/”一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。
值得指出的是，本申请实施例所描述的技术不限于长期演进型(Long Term Evolution，LTE)/LTE的演进(LTE-Advanced，LTE-A)系统，还可用于其他无线通信系统，诸如码分多址(Code Division Multiple Access，CDMA)、时分多址(Time Division Multiple Access，TDMA)、频分多址(Frequency Division Multiple Access，FDMA)、正交频分多址(Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access，OFDMA)、单载波频分多址(Single-carrier Frequency Division Multiple Access，SC-FDMA)和其他系统。本申请实施例中的术语“系统”和“网络”常被可互换地使用，所描述的技术既可用于以上提及的系统和无线电技术，也可用于其他系统和无线电技术。以下描述出于示例目的描述了新空口(New Radio，NR)系统，并且在以下大部分描述中使用NR术语，但是这些技术也可应用于NR系统应用以外的应用，如第6代(6th Generation，6G)通信系统。
图1示出本申请实施例可应用的一种无线通信系统的框图。无线通信系统包括终端11和网络侧设备12。其中，终端11可以是手机、平板电脑(Tablet Personal Computer)、膝上型电脑(Laptop Computer)或称为笔记本电脑、个人数字助理(Personal Digital Assistant，PDA)、掌上电脑、上网本、超级移动个人计算机(ultra-mobile personal computer，UMPC)、移动上网装置(Mobile Internet Device，MID)、增强现实(augmented reality，AR)/虚拟现实(virtual reality，VR)设备、机器人、可穿戴式设备(Wearable Device)、车载设备(Vehicle User Equipment，VUE)、行人终端(Pedestrian User Equipment，PUE)、智能家居(具有无线通信功能的家居设备，如冰箱、电视、洗衣机或者家具等)、游戏机、个人计算机(personal computer，PC)、柜员机或者自助机等终端侧设备，可穿戴式设备包括：智能手表、智能手环、智能耳机、智能眼镜、智能首饰(智能手镯、智能手链、智能戒指、智能项链、智能脚镯、智能脚链等)、智能腕带、智能服装等。需要说明的是，在本申请实施例并不限定终端11的具体类型。网络侧设备12可以包括接入网设备或核心网节点，其中，接入网设备也可以称为无线接入网设备、无线接入网(Radio Access Network，RAN)、无线接入网功能或无线接入网单元。接入网设备可以包括基站、无线局域网(Wireless Local Area  Networks，WLAN)接入点或WiFi节点等，基站可被称为节点B、演进节点B(eNB)、接入点、基收发机站(Base Transceiver Station，BTS)、无线电基站、无线电收发机、基本服务集(Basic Service Set，BSS)、扩展服务集(Extended Service Set，ESS)、家用B节点、家用演进型B节点、发送接收点(Transmission Reception Point，TRP)或所述领域中其他某个合适的术语，只要达到相同的技术效果，所述基站不限于特定技术词汇，需要说明的是，在本申请实施例中仅以NR系统中的基站为例进行介绍，并不限定基站的具体类型。核心网节点可以包含但不限于如下至少一项：核心网节点、核心网功能、移动管理实体(Mobility Management Entity，MME)、接入移动管理功能(Access and Mobility Management Function，AMF)、会话管理功能(Session Management Function，SMF)、用户平面功能(User Plane Function，UPF)、策略控制功能(Policy Control Function，PCF)、策略与计费规则功能单元(Policy and Charging Rules Function，PCRF)、边缘应用服务发现功能(Edge Application Server Discovery Function，EASDF)、统一数据管理(Unified Data Management，UDM)，统一数据仓储(Unified Data Repository，UDR)、归属用户服务器(Home Subscriber Server，HSS)、集中式网络配置(Centralized network configuration，CNC)、网络存储功能(Network Repository Function，NRF)，网络开放功能(Network Exposure Function，NEF)、本地NEF(Local NEF，或L-NEF)、绑定支持功能(Binding Support Function，BSF)、应用功能(Application Function，AF)等。需要说明的是，在本申请实施例中仅以NR系统中的核心网节点为例进行介绍，并不限定核心网节点的具体类型。
本申请涉及通信感知一体化(Integrated Sensing and Communication，ISAC)(简称“通感一体化”)技术，以下先对通感一体化技术进行相关介绍。
无线通信和雷达传感一直在并行发展，但交集有限。它们在信号处理算法、设备以及一定程度上的系统架构方面都有很多共性。近年来，这两个系统在共存、合作和联合设计上受到了越来越多研究人员的关注。
早期人们对通信系统和雷达系统共存的问题进行了广泛的研究，研究侧重是开发有效的干扰管理技术，使两个单独部署的系统能够在相互不干扰的情况下平稳运行。虽然雷达和通信系统可能在同一位置，甚至物理上集成，但它们在时间/频率域传输的是不同的两种信号。它们通过合作共享相同的资源，以最大限度地减少同时工作是对彼此之间的干扰。相应的措施包括波束赋形、合作频谱共享、主次频谱共享、动态共存等。然而有效的干扰消除通常对节点的移动性和节点之间的信息交换有着严格的要求，因此频谱效率的提高实际比较有限。由于共存系统中的干扰是由发射两个独立的信号引起的，因此很自然地会问，我们是否可以同时使用一个发射信号同时进行通信和雷达传感。雷达系统通常使用特别设计的波形，如短脉冲和啁啾，能够实现高功率辐射和简化接收机处理。然而这些波形对雷达探测来说不是必需的，无源雷达或无源传感以不同的无线电信号作为感知信号就是一个很好的例子。
机器学习，特别是深度学习技术进一步促进了非专用无线电信号用于雷达传感的潜力。 有了这些技术，传统雷达正朝着更通用的无线感知方向发展。这里的无线感知可以广泛地指从接收到的无线电信号中检索信息，而不是在发射机上调制到信号的通信数据。对于感知目标位置相关的无线感知，可以通过常用的信号处理方法，对目标信号反射时延、到达角(Angle of Arrival，AOA)、离开角(Angle of Departure，AOD)和多普勒等动力学参数进行估计；对于感知目标物理特征，可以通过测量设备、对象或者固有模式信号来实现。两种感知方式可以分别称为感知参数估计以及模式识别。在这个意义上，无线感知是指使用无线电信号的更通用的传感技术和应用。
通感一体化技术是将无线感知功能集成到移动通信网络中的技术，集成了无线感知功能的移动通信网络可称为感知移动网络(Perceptive Mobile Networks，PMNs)。PMN可以从目前的第5代(5th Generation，5G)移动网络演变而来，有望成为一个无处不在的无线传感网络，同时提供稳定高质量的移动通信服务。它可以建立在现有移动网络基础设施之上，而不需要对网络结构和设备进行重大改变。它将释放移动网络的最大能力，并避免花费高昂基础设施成本去额外单独建设新的广域无线传感网络。随着覆盖范围的扩大，综合通信和传感能力有望实现许多新的应用。感知移动网络能够同时提供通信和无线感知服务，并且由于其较大的宽带覆盖范围和强大的基础设施，有可能成为一种无处不在的无线传感解决方案。其联合协调的通信和传感能力将提高我们社会的生产力，并有助于催生出大量现有传感器网络无法有效实现的新应用。利用移动信号进行被动传感的一些早期工作已经证明了它的潜力。例如基于全球移动通信系统(Global System for Mobile Communications，GSM)的无线电信号的交通监控、天气预报和降雨遥感。感知移动网络可以广泛应用于交通、通信、能源、精准农业和安全领域的通信和传感，而现有的解决方案要么不可行，要么效率低下。它还可以为现有的传感器网络提供互补的传感能力，具有独特的昼夜操作功能，能够穿透雾、树叶甚至固体物体。
移动通信网络中，基站(包括基站上的某1个或多个传输接收点(Transmission Reception Point，TRP)或用户设备(User Equipment，UE，又称“终端”)(包括终端上1个或多个子阵列/面板(Panel))可以作为参与感知或通感一体化业务的感知节点。
感知节点通过发送和接收感知信号，可以实现对感知目标进行感知(或称感知测量)，感知目标既可以是某个特定的区域，也可以是某个特定的实体目标。感知信号可以是不包含传输信息的信号，如LTE/NR同步和参考信号，包括同步信号和物理广播信道(Synchronization Signal and PBCH block，SSB)信号、信道状态信息参考信号(Channel State Information Reference Signal，CSI-RS)、解调参考信号(Demodulation Reference Signal，DMRS)、信道探测参考信号SRS、定位参考信号(Positioning Reference Signal，PRS)、相位追踪参考信号(Phase-tracking reference signal，PTRS)等，也可以是雷达常用的单频连续波(Continuous Wave，CW)、调频连续波(Frequency Modulated CW，FMCW)，以及超宽带高斯脉冲等；还可以是新设计的专用感知信号，例如，具有良好的相关特性和低峰均功率比(Peak to Average Power Ratio，PAPR)，或者新设计的通感一体化信号，既承 载一定信息，同时具有较好的感知性能。
感知方式可以包括如下两种：其一，自发自收的感知方式。该感知方式中，感知信号的发送节点(即信号发送节点)和感知信号的接收节点(即信号接收节点)为同一感知节点，感知节点通过接收自己发送的信号的回波进行感知。其二，A发B收的感知方式。该感知方式中，感知信号的发送节点和感知信号的接收节点为不同的感知节点。为了便于理解和说明，本申请实施例中，自发自收的感知方式统一称为第一感知方式，A发B收的感知方式统一称为第二感知方式。为了简化描述，感知节点采用第一感知方式对感知目标进行感知测量可称为感知节点对感知目标进行第一感知，感知节点采用第二感知方式对感知目标进行感知测量可称为感知节点对感知目标进行第二感知。
目前，感知节点通常采用某种预先确定或预先配置的感知方式对感知目标进行感知测量，例如，感知节点采用第一感知方式对感知目标进行感知测量，或者，感知节点采用第二感知方式对感知目标进行感知测量。然而，在某些情况下(例如：感知物体的状态发生变化，感知区域的环境发生改变，或者，感知节点的状态发生变化)，感知节点可能无法对感知目标进行准确的感知测量，这将导致感知测量的可靠性较差。
基于此，本申请实施例提供一种感知方式切换方法、感知方式切换装置、第一设备、第一节点及存储介质，以解决感知测量可靠性较差的问题。
下面结合附图，通过一些实施例及其应用场景对本申请实施例提供的感知方式切换方法、感知方式切换装置、第一设备、第一节点及存储介质进行详细地说明。
图2示出本申请实施例提供的一种感知方式切换方法的流程图。如图2所示，感知方式切换方法包括如下步骤：
步骤201：第一设备获取第一测量报告，所述第一测量报告由源节点采用第一感知方式对感知目标进行第一感知测量而生成，所述第一感知方式的信号发送节点和所述第一感知方式的信号接收节点为同一节点，所述第一设备与所述源节点相同或不同；
步骤202：第一设备根据所述第一测量报告，确定是否发起对所述感知目标的感知方式由所述第一感知方式切换为第二感知方式，所述第二感知方式的信号发送节点和所述第二感知方式的信号接收节点为不同节点。
本申请实施例涉及将对感知目标的感知方式由第一感知方式切换为第二感知方式，在切换之前对感知目标进行第一感知的感知节点可称为源节点，第一设备可以是源节点，也可以是其他节点。也就是说，源节点可以自主根据第一测量报告(该测量报告可称为“切换测量报告”)来确定是否发起感知方式的切换，或者，源节点的接入节点或核心网节点根据源节点的第一测量报告来确定是否发起感知方式的切换，此情况下，源节点的接入节点或核心网节点接收源节点发送的第一测量报告，并基于第一测量报告确定是否发起感知方式的切换。感知目标既可以是某个特定的区域，也可以是某个特定的实体目标。
本申请实施例中的第一感知测量可理解为为了获得第一测量报告，源节点所进行的“切换测量”。
需要说明的是，对感知目标，可以有单组感知节点进行感知测量，也可以有多组感知节点协作进行感知测量。例如，切换之前，对感知目标进行第一感知的源节点的数量可以为一个或多个，每个源节点分别对感知目标进行第一感知。所发起的切换，可以是发起由某个源节点对感知目标进行第一感知切换为一对或多对感知节点对感知目标进行第二感知。
本申请实施例中，在源节点采用第一感知方式对感知目标进行感知测量的场景下，第一设备根据第一测量报告来确定是否发起对感知目标的感知方式由第一感知方式切换到第二感知方式。第一设备基于第一测量报告，能够合理地确定是否需要发起对感知目标的感知方式由第一感知方式切换为第二感知方式，能够避免源节点仍然按照固有的第一感知方式对感知目标进行无效的感知测量。由于感知测量所采用的感知方式可切换，这使得感知测量能够以合适的感知方式进行，从而能够提高感知测量的可靠性。
在一些实施例中，所述第一设备包括如下任一项：
在所述源节点为第一网络侧设备的情况下，所述第一设备包括核心网节点或所述第一网络侧设备；
在所述源节点为第一终端的情况下，所述第一设备包括核心网节点、所述第一终端或所述第一终端接入的第二网络侧设备。
上述核心网节点例如可以是感知功能网元(Sensing Function，SF)、AMF或核感知应用服务器等。
上述第一测量报告的内容可以根据实际需要进行设置，例如，在一些实施例中，所述第一测量报告包括如下至少一项：
至少一项感知测量量的测量值；
至少一项感知性能评价指标的测量结果；
至少一项通信测量量的测量值；
至少一项通信性能评价指标的测量结果；
第一指示信息，用于指示预设事件是否发生，所述预设事件用于触发发起对感知目标的感知方式由所述第一感知方式切换为所述第二感知方式；
第二指示信息，用于指示预设切换条件是否满足，所述预设切换条件用于触发发起对感知目标的感知方式由所述第一感知方式切换为所述第二感知方式。
在一些示例中，第一测量报告至少包括切换测量所需的感知测量量的测量值(或测量结果)，切换测量所需的感知测量量可以包括当前感知业务的感知测量量。
本申请实施例中的感知测量量可以包括如下至少一项：
第一级测量量(又称接收信号/原始信道信息)，例如可以包括接收信号/信道响应复数结果，幅度/相位，I路/Q路及其运算结果(运算可包括加减乘除、矩阵加减乘、矩阵转置、三角关系运算、平方根运算和幂次运算等，以及上述运算结果的门限检测结果、最大/最小值提取结果等；运算还可以包括快速傅里叶变换(Fast Fourier Transform，FFT)/快速 傅里叶逆变换(Inverse Fast Fourier Transform，IFFT)、离散傅里叶变换(Discrete Fourier Transform，DFT)/离散傅里叶逆变换(Inverse Discrete Fourier Transform，IDFT)、二维快速傅里叶变换(2D-FFT)、三维快速傅里叶变换(3D-FFT)、匹配滤波、自相关运算、小波变换和数字滤波等，以及上述运算结果的门限检测结果、最大/最小值提取结果等)；
第二级测量量(又称基本测量量)，例如可以包括时延、多普勒、角度、强度及其多维组合表示；
第三级测量量(又称基本属性/状态)，例如可以包括距离、速度、朝向、空间位置和加速度中的至少一项；
第四级测量量(又称进阶属性/状态)，例如可以包括感知目标是否存在、感知目标的轨迹、动作、表情、生命体征、数量、成像结果、天气、空气质量、形状、材质和成分中的至少一项。
可选地，感知测量量还包括对应的标签信息，例如可以包括以下至少一项：感知信号标识信息、感知测量配置标识信息、感知业务信息(例如，感知业务ID)、数据订阅ID、测量量用途(例如，通信、感知、通感)、时间信息、感知节点信息(例如节点ID、节点位置、设备朝向)、感知链路信息(例如，感知链路序号、收发节点标识)、感知测量量说明信息(形式，例如幅度值、相位值、幅度和相位结合的复数值；资源类型，例如时域测量结果、频域资源测量结果)、测量量指标信息(例如信噪比(Signal Noise Ratio，SNR)、感知SNR)。
本申请实施例中的感知性能评价指标可以包括如下至少一项：
感知SNR，表示感知目标或感知区域反射的感知信号能量，与环境和设备中的噪声信号能量的比值；
感知信干噪比(Signal to Interference plus Noise Ratio，SINR)，表示感知目标或感知区域反射的感知信号能量，与环境和设备中的干扰信号和噪声信号的能量的和的比值；
同一种感知测量量的多次测量值的统计均值、标准差或方差；
感知测量量的测量值或感知结果的预测值与实际测量值偏差，以及所述偏差的统计均值、标准差或方差；
感知可复现评价指标，例如前后两个序列样点间欧式距离(Euclidean Distance)之和，或者动态时间规划(Dynamic Time Warping，DTW)中的规整路径距离，或者其他能够反映两个序列的相似性的指标，其中，其他能够反映两个序列的相似性的指标包括但不限于：最长公共字符串(Longest Common Subsequence，LCSS)、实序列编辑距离(Edit Distance on Real Sequences，EDR)、实惩罚编辑距离(Edit Distance with Real Penalty，ERP)、豪斯多夫距离(Hausdorff Distance)、弗雷歇距离(Fréchet Distance)、单向距离(One Way Distance，OWD)和多线位置距离(Locality In-between Polylines，LIP)等。
在一些实施例中，所述第一设备与所述源节点不同；
在所述第一设备获取第一测量报告之前，所述方法还包括：
所述第一设备向所述源节点发送第一测量请求，所述第一测量请求用于请求所述源节点采用所述第一感知方式对所述感知目标进行所述第一感知测量；
所述第一设备获取第一测量报告，包括：
所述第一设备接收所述源节点发送的第一测量报告，所述第一测量报告由所述源节点基于所述第一感知测量而生成。
在一些实施例中，第一设备可以基于目标事件触发切换测量，即第一设备可以基于目标事件触发向源节点发送第一测量请求，也就是说，所述第一设备向所述源节点发送第一测量请求，包括：在所述第一设备确定发生目标事件的情况下，所述第一设备向所述源节点发送第一测量请求。这里，所述目标事件可包括以下至少一项：
所述感知目标的状态发生变化；
所述源节点的位置发生变化；
所述感知目标所在感知区域的环境发生变化；
所述源节点可用的感知资源发生变化；
所述源节点的感知测量量的测量值达到第一预设门限；
所述源节点的通信测量量的测量值达到第二预设门限。
感知目标的状态发生变化例如可以包括如下至少一项：感知目标的位置发生变化、感知目标的速度发生变化。
感知目标所在感知区域的环境发生变化例如可以是感知区域出现阻挡。
源节点可用的感知资源发生变化例如可以是：源节点突发其他高优先级的感知业务、通信业务或通感一体化业务。该情况下，第一设备可基于源节点的剩余可用感知资源评估是否需要发起感知方式的切换，在确定需要发起感知方式的切换的情况下，第一设备基于这样的目标事件向源节点发送第一测量请求。
上述第一预设门限可以理解包括不同感知测量量对应的切换门限。源节点的感知测量量的测量值达到第一预设门限可以理解为感知信号接收功率、感知SNR、感知信干噪比(Signal to Interference plus Noise Ratio，SINR)、距离测量值、速度测量值和角度测量值中的至少一项满足对应的切换门限。
上述通信测量量可以包括以下至少一项：参考信号接收功率(Reference Signal Received Power，RSRP)、SNR、SINR、参考信号接收质量(Reference Signal Received Quality，RSRQ)、接收信号强度指示器(Received Signal Strength Indicator，RSSI)、误码率、误块率、吞吐量和频谱效率等。
在一些实施例中，在所述第一设备获取第一测量报告之前，所述方法还包括：
所述第一设备向所述源节点发送第一测量配置信息，所述第一测量配置信息用于所述源节点进行所述第一感知测量。
该第一测量配置信息又可称为切换测量配置信息，第一测量配置信息可以包括以下至少一项：
测量对象指示信息，用于指示需要测量的一个或多个第一信号，第一信号可关联感知测量量和感知参数配置信息中的至少一项；
测量报告配置信息，例如可包括测量报告的上报原则和测量报告的上报格式，测量报告的上报原则可以包括周期性上报或者事件触发原则，测量报告的上报格式可以包括上报的小区最大数量、波束数量等；
目标事件的配置信息，用于触发执行所述第一感知测量；
测量标识(即测量ID)，每个测量标识可对应一个测量对象和一个测量报告配置信息。
在源节点采用第一感知方式对感知目标进行第一感知测量之前，第一设备可以先向源节点发送第一测量请求，在第一设备接收到源节点的应答之后，第一设备再向源节点发送第一测量配置信息。
在一些实施例中，所述第一测量配置信息包含在所述第一测量请求中。这样，在源节点采用第一感知方式对感知目标进行第一感知测量之前，第一设备可以向源节点发送第一测量请求，并在第一测量请求中包含第一测量配置信息，由此，可以适度降低信令和资源浪费。
在一些实施例中，所述第一设备与所述源节点相同；
在所述第一设备获取第一测量报告之后，所述方法还包括：
所述第一设备向第二设备发送所述第一测量报告，所述第二设备包括核心网节点或所述源节点接入的网络侧设备。
对于第一设备与源节点相同的情况，也就是源节点自主进行第一感知测量而获得第一测量报告的情况而言，第一设备(即源节点)还可以向核心网节点或源节点接入的网络侧设备发送第一测量报告。例如，在源节点为网络侧设备的情况下，源节点可以向核心网节点发送第一测量报告；在源节点为终端的情况下，源节点可以向核心网节点或源节点接入的网络侧设备发送第一测量报告。
在一些实施例中，所述第一设备与所述源节点相同；
所述第一设备获取第一测量报告，包括：
所述第一设备在确定目标事件发生的情况下，获取第一测量报告；
其中，所述目标事件包括如下至少一项：
所述感知目标的状态发生变化；
所述源节点的位置发生变化；
所述感知目标所在感知区域的环境发生变化；
所述源节点可用的感知资源发生变化；
所述源节点的感知测量量的测量值达到第三预设门限；
所述源节点的通信测量量的测量值达到第四预设门限。
该实施方式中，源节点可以在确定目标事件发生的情况下，自主进行第一感知测量而获得第一测量报告。该实施方式中的目标事件可参见前述关于目标事件的相关说明，为避 免重复，对此不作赘述。
在一些实施例中，所述方法还包括：
所述第一设备在确定发起对所述感知目标的感知方式由所述第一感知方式切换为所述第二感知方式的情况下，所述第一设备向N个第一候选节点发送第一请求消息，所述第一请求消息用于请求至少一个目标候选节点采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量，N为大于或等于1的整数；
所述第一设备接收所述N个第一候选节点中的至少一个第一候选节点发送的反馈消息，所述反馈消息用于指示所述目标候选节点是否同意采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量。
上述反馈消息可理解为针对第一请求消息的响应消息，由第一候选节点发送给第一设备。在反馈消息指示目标候选节点同意采用第二感知方式对感知目标进行感知测量的情况下，反馈消息可称为应答消息，在反馈消息指示目标候选节点不同意采用第二感知方式对感知目标进行感知测量的情况下，反馈消息可称为拒绝消息。
第一候选节点既可以是网络侧设备，也可以是终端。第一候选节点可理解为可能按照第二感知方式对感知目标进行感知测量的节点，或者为可能按照第二感知方式对感知目标进行感知测量的节点的接入节点。N个第一候选节点可以包括源节点，也可以不包括源节点，在第一设备与源节点不同的情况下，N个第一候选节点可以包括源节点。
目标候选节点可理解为可能按照第二感知方式对感知目标进行感知测量的节点。在第一候选节点为可能按照第二感知方式对感知目标进行感知测量的节点的情况下，目标候选节点可理解为第一候选节点，此时，第一请求消息可理解为用于请求至少一个第一候选节点采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量。而在第一候选节点为可能按照第二感知方式对感知目标进行感知测量的节点的接入节点的情况下，目标候选节点可理解为第一候选节点选择的可能按照第二感知方式对感知目标进行感知测量的节点。
作为示例，假设第一设备确定发起对感知目标的感知方式由第一感知方式切换为由终端执行的第二感知方式，那么，第一设备既可以直接向N个候选终端发送第一请求消息，以请求至少一个候选终端采用第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量，第一设备也可以向N个候选网络侧设备发送第一请求消息，以向候选网络侧设备请求至少一个候选终端采用第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量。
作为另一示例，假设第一设备确定发起对感知目标的感知方式由第一感知方式切换为由网络侧设备执行的第二感知方式，那么，第一设备既可以直接向N个候选网络侧设备发送第一请求消息，以请求至少一个候选网络侧设备采用第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量。
在一些实施例中，所述方法还包括：
所述第一设备在确定发起对所述感知目标的感知方式由所述第一感知方式切换为所述第二感知方式的情况下，确定所述第二感知方式的交互类型；
所述第一设备向N个第一候选节点发送第一请求消息，包括：
所述第一设备根据所述第二感知方式的交互类型，向N个第一候选节点发送第一请求消息；
其中，所述第二感知方式的交互类型包括以下任一项：
第一交互类型，所述第二感知方式的信号发送节点和信号接收节点为不同的两个网络侧设备，即信号发送节点和信号接收节点中的一者为一网络侧设备，另一者为另一网络侧设备；
第二交互类型，所述第二感知方式的信号发送节点和信号接收节点中的一者为网络侧设备，另一者为终端；
第三交互类型，所述第二感知方式的信号发送节点和信号接收节点为不同的两个终端，即信号发送节点和信号接收节点中的一者为一终端，另一者为另一终端。
由于第二感知方式中，感知信号的接收节点和发送节点不同，这就涉及到感知信号的接收节点和发送节点存在多种不同的组合，第二感知方式中，感知信号的接收节点和发送节点的组合类型即可理解为第二感知方式的交互类型。
第一设备在确定发起对所述感知目标的感知方式由所述第一感知方式切换为所述第二感知方式的情况下，可确定第二感知方式的交互类型，并根据第二感知方式的交互类型，向N个第一候选节点发送第一请求消息。
作为示例，假设确定的第二感知方式的交互类型为第一交互类型，则第一设备可以向N个候选网络侧设备发送第一请求信息，而不是向N个候选终端发送第一请求信息。
第一请求消息中可以包含第二感知方式的交互类型的指示信息，用于指示在感知方式切换完成后进行某个交互类型的第二感知。例如，第一请求消息中包含第一交互类型的指示信息，用于指示在感知方式切换完成后进行网络侧设备-网络侧设备的第二感知。
在一些实施例中，第一请求消息包括如下至少一项：
感知需求的指示信息，用于指示例如感知目标的区域、感知目标的对象类型、感知目标所需的感知功能、感知目的、感知结果等；
感知服务质量(Quality of Service，QoS)的指示信息，用于指示以下信息的至少一项：感知分辨率(进一步可分为：测距分辨率、测角分辨率、测速分辨率和成像分辨率等)、感知精度(进一步可分为：测距精度、测角精度、测速精度和定位精度等)、感知范围(进一步可分为：测距范围、测速范围、测角范围、成像范围等)、感知时延(如从感知信号发送到获得感知结果的时间间隔，或，从感知需求发起到获取感知结果的时间间隔)、感知更新速率(如相邻两次执行感知并获得感知结果的时间间隔)、检测概率(如在感知对象存在的情况下被正确检测出来的概率)、虚警概率(如在感知对象不存在的情况下错误检测出感知目标的概率)，感知安全性和感知隐私性；
感知测量量的指示信息，用于指示一项或多项感知测量量；
感知测量结果的指示信息，用于指示基于至少一种感知测量量的测量值直接或间接得 到的感知结果；
感知条件的指示信息，用于指示感知开始时间、感知结束时间、感知持续时间中的至少一项；
感知目标或感知区域先验信息，用于指示感知目标的类型、感知目标所在大致位置或区域、感知目标的历史状态(如速度、角度、距离、加速度、空间朝向等)中的至少一项；
感知方式切换成功判决条件的指示信息，用于指示至少一种感知测量量的测量值和/或通信测量量的测量结果在预设时间内或预设次数下达到的预设门限。
在一些实施例中，所述第一设备根据如下至少一项确定所述N个第一候选节点：
候选节点的位置信息；
候选节点的天线面板朝向信息；
候选节点的状态信息；
候选节点的感知能力信息；
候选节点可用的感知资源信息；
候选节点的信道状态信息。
作为示例，在N个第一候选节点包括至少一个候选终端的情况下，第一设备可根据如下至少一项确定候选终端：
候选终端的位置信息；
候选终端的天线面板朝向信息；
候选终端的状态信息，例如可以包括移动速度、移动方向、保持静止/运动的时间段等信息；
候选终端的感知能力信息，例如可以包括终端的感知覆盖范围、可用于感知的最大带宽、感知业务最大可持续时间、所能支持的感知信号类型及帧格式和终端的天线阵列信息(如阵列类型、天线数、阵列孔径、天线极化特性、阵元增益和方向性特性等)；
候选终端当前可用于进行感知的资源信息，例如可以包括时间资源(符号数、时隙数、帧数等)、频率资源(如资源块(Resource Block，RB)数、资源单元(Resource Element，RE)数、总带宽、可用频段位置等)、天线资源(如天线阵列数/天线子阵列数)、相位调制资源(如硬件移相器数)和正交码资源(如正交码长度和数量)中的至少一项；
候选终端的信道状态信息，例如可以包括至少一个通信链路的信道传输函数/信道冲激响应、信道质量指示(Channel Quality Indicator，CQI)、预编码矩阵指示(Precoding Matrix Indicator，PMI)、CSI-RS资源指示、SSB资源指示、层指示(Layer Indicator，LI)、秩指示(Rank indicator，RI)和层1参考信号接收功率(L1-Reference Signal Received Power，L1-RSRP)中的至少一项。
作为示例，在N个第一候选节点包括至少一个候选网络侧设备的情况下，第一设备可根据如下至少一项确定候选网络侧设备：
候选网络侧设备的位置信息；
候选网络侧设备的天线面板朝向信息；
候选网络侧设备的感知能力信息，例如可以包括网络侧设备的感知覆盖范围、可用于感知的最大带宽、感知业务最大可持续时间、所能支持的感知信号类型及帧格式和网络侧设备的天线阵列信息(如阵列类型、天线数、阵列孔径、天线极化特性、阵元增益和方向性特性等)；
候选网络侧设备当前可用于进行感知的资源信息，例如可以包括时间资源(符号数、时隙数、帧数等)、频率资源(如RB数、RE数、总带宽、可用频段位置等)、天线资源(如天线阵列数/天线子阵列数)、相位调制资源(如硬件移相器数)和正交码资源(如正交码长度和数量)中的至少一项；
候选网络侧设备的信道状态信息，例如可以包括至少一个通信链路的信道传输函数/信道冲激响应、CQI、PMI、CSI-RS资源指示、SSB资源指示、LI、RI和L1-RSRP中的至少一项。
在一些实施例中，所述反馈消息包括如下至少一项：
第一反馈消息，由所述第一候选节点根据所述第一请求消息确定，用于指示所述第一候选节点是否同意采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量，所述目标候选节点包括所述第一候选节点；
第二反馈消息，由第二候选节点根据所述第一候选节点发送的第二请求消息确定，用于指示所述第二候选节点是否同意采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量，所述第二请求消息用于请求所述第二候选节点采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量，所述目标候选节点包括所述第二候选节点。
第一反馈消息可理解为由第一候选节点基于第一请求消息直接确定的，用于指示第一候选节点是否同意采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量，由第一候选节点反馈给第一设备。第二反馈消息可理解为由第二候选节点基于第二请求消息确定的，用于指示第二候选节点是否同意采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量，由第一候选节点反馈给第一设备。
第二候选节点既可以是与第一候选节点关联的，与第一候选节点共同采用第二感知方式对感知目标进行感知测量的节点，也可以是由第一候选节点选择的，用于采用第二感知方式对感知目标进行感知测量的节点。为了便于理解，以下通过示例进行说明：
示例一：第一设备向第一候选网络侧设备(即第一候选节点，同时也是目标候选节点)发送第一请求消息，用于请求在感知方式切换完成后进行网络侧设备-网络侧设备的第二感知。第一候选网络侧设备基于第一请求消息向第一设备发送第一反馈消息，用于指示其是否同意采用第二感知方式对感知目标进行感知测量。
示例二：第一设备向第一候选网络侧设备(即第一候选节点，同时也是目标候选节点)发送第一请求消息，用于请求在感知方式切换完成后进行网络侧设备-网络侧设备的第二感知。第一候选网络侧设备基于第一请求消息向第一设备发送第一反馈消息，用于指示其 是否同意采用第二感知方式对感知目标进行感知测量。
并且，第一候选网络侧设备向第二候选网络侧设备(即第二候选节点，同时也是目标候选节点)发送第二请求消息，用于请求第二候选网络侧设备采用第二感知方式对感知目标进行感知测量。第二候选网络侧设备基于第二请求消息向第一候选网络侧设备发送反馈消息，用于指示其是否同意采用第二感知方式对感知目标进行感知测量，第一候选网络侧设备基于第二候选网络侧设备反馈的反馈消息向第一设备发送第二反馈消息，用于指示第二候选网络侧设备是否同意采用第二感知方式对感知目标进行感知测量。
示例三：第一设备在确定发起对感知目标的感知方式由第一感知方式切换为第二感知方式的情况下，第一设备向第一候选网络侧设备(即第一候选节点)发送第一请求消息，用于请求在感知方式切换完成后进行终端-终端的第二感知。
第一候选网络侧设备基于第一请求消息，向第一候选终端和第二候选终端(即第二候选节点，同时也是目标候选节点)发送第二请求消息，用于请求第一候选终端和第二候选终端采用第二感知方式对感知目标进行感知测量，候选终端基于第二请求消息向第一候选网络侧设备发送反馈消息，用于指示其是否同意采用第二感知方式对感知目标进行感知测量，第一候选网络侧设备基于候选终端反馈的反馈消息向第一设备发送第二反馈消息，用于指示候选终端是否同意采用第二感知方式对感知目标进行感知测量。
示例四：第一设备在确定发起对感知目标的感知方式由第一感知方式切换为第二感知方式的情况下，第一设备向第一候选网络侧设备(即第一候选节点，同时也是目标候选节点)发送第一请求消息，用于请求第一候选网络侧设备在感知方式切换完成后进行网络侧设备-终端的第二感知。
第一候选网络侧设备基于第一请求消息，向第一候选终端(即第二候选节点，同时也是目标候选节点)发送第二请求消息，用于请求第一候选终端采用第二感知方式对感知目标进行感知测量，第一候选终端基于第二请求消息向第一候选网络侧设备发送反馈消息，用于指示其是否同意采用第二感知方式对感知目标进行感知测量，第一候选网络侧设备基于第一候选终端反馈的反馈消息向第一设备发送第二反馈消息，用于指示第一候选终端是否同意采用第二感知方式对感知目标进行感知测量。
在一些实施例中，在所述反馈消息用于指示所述目标候选节点同意采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量的情况下，所述反馈消息还包括第一参数配置信息，所述第一参数配置信息用于指示所述目标候选节点对所述感知目标进行感知测量的感知参数配置信息。
第一参数配置信息可以理解为目标候选节点推荐的感知参数配置信息，第一参数配置信息可以用于配置以下至少一项：
波形类型，例如正交频分复用(Orthogonal frequency division multiplex，OFDM)、单载波频分复用接入技术(Single Carrier Frequency Division Multiple Accessing，SC-FDMA)、正交时频空间(Orthogonal Time Frequency Space，OTFS)、调频连续波(Frequency Modulated  Continuous Wave，FMCW)和脉冲信号中的至少一项；
子载波间隔，例如OFDM系统的子载波间隔，如30KHz；
保护间隔，例如从信号结束发送时刻到该信号的最迟回波信号被接收的时刻之间的时间间隔，该参数正比于最大感知距离，例如可以通过2dmax/c计算得到，其中，dmax表示最大感知距离(属于感知需求)，对于自发自收的感知信号，dmax表示感知信号收发点到信号发射点的最大距离，在某些情况下，OFDM信号循环前缀(Cyclic prefix，CP)可以用于指示最小保护间隔；
带宽，该参数反比于距离分辨率，可以通过c/(2Δd)得到，其中，Δd表示距离分辨率(属于感知需求)，c表示光速；
突发(burst)持续时间，该参数反比于速率分辨率(属于感知需求)，该参数是感知信号的时间跨度，主要为了计算多普勒频偏，该参数可通过c/(2fcΔv)计算得到，其中，Δv表示速度分辨率，fc表示感知信号的载频；
时域间隔，该参数可通过c/(2fcvrange)计算得到，其中，vrange表示最大速率减去最小速度(属于感知需求)，该参数是相邻的两个感知信号之间的时间间隔；
发送信号功率，例如从-20dBm到23dBm每隔2dBm取一个值；
信号格式，例如是SRS、DMRS、PRS等，或者其他预定义的信号，以及相关的序列格式等信息；
信号方向，例如感知信号的方向或者波束信息；
时间资源，例如感知信号所在的时隙索引或者时隙的符号索引，其中，时间资源分为两种，一种是一次性的时间资源，例如一个符号发送一个全向的感知信号；一种是非一次性的时间资源，例如多组周期性的时间资源或者不连续的时间资源(可包含开始时间和结束时间)，每一组周期性的时间资源发送同一方向的感知信号，不同组的周期性时间资源上的波束方向不同；
频率资源，包括感知信号的中心频点、带宽、RB或者子载波、参考点A(Point A)、起始带宽位置等；
准共址(Quasi co-location，QCL)关系，例如感知信号包括多个资源，每个资源与一个SSB QCL，QCL包括类型A(Type A)、Type B、Type C或者Type D；
天线配置信息。
可选地，上述天线配置信息可以包括如下至少一项：
用于发送和/或接收感知信号的天线阵元ID或者天线端口ID；
用于发送和/或接收感知信号的面板ID以及阵元ID；
用于发送和/或接收感知信号的天线阵元相对天线阵列上某个局部参考点的位置信息(可以用笛卡尔坐标(x，y，z)或者球坐标表示)；
用于发送和/或接收感知信号的面板相对天线阵列上某个局部参考点的位置信息(可以用笛卡尔坐标(x，y，z)或者球坐标表示)，以及这些被选择面板内的用于发送感知信号 的天线阵元相对面板某个统一参考点(例如面板中心点)的位置信息(可以用笛卡尔坐标(x，y，z)或者球坐标表示)；
天线阵元的位图(bitmap)信息，例如：使用“1”指示阵元被选择用于发送和/或接收感知信号，使用“0”表示阵元未被选择，反之亦可；
阵列面板的位图信息，例如：使用“1”指示面板被选择用于发送和/或接收感知信号，使用“0”表示面板未被选择，反之亦可；
阵列面板的位图信息以及被选择的面板内的阵元的位图信息，例如：使用“1”指示阵元被选择用于发送和/或接收感知信号，使用“0”表示阵元未被选择，反之亦可。
在一些实施例中，在所述第一设备向N个第一候选节点发送第一请求消息之后，所述方法还包括：
所述第一设备向第二设备发送第一指示消息，所述第二设备包括核心网节点、源节点或所述源节点的源接入基站，所述第一指示消息用于指示对所述感知目标的感知方式由所述第一感知方式切换为第二感知方式。
在一些实施例中，在所述反馈消息用于指示目标候选节点不同意采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量的情况下，或者，在预设等待时间内，第一设备未接收到反馈消息的情况下，所述方法还包括如下任一项：
第一设备重新确定候选节点；
取消切换，并维持当前第一感知；
取消切换，并结束当前第一感知。
在一些实施例中，在所述反馈消息用于指示所述目标候选节点同意采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量的情况下，所述方法还包括：
所述第一设备根据所述反馈消息，从所述目标候选节点中确定M个目标节点，M为大于或等于1的整数；
所述第一设备向所述M个目标节点发送第一通知消息，所述第一通知消息用于指示所述M个目标节点采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量。
第一通知消息可以理解为切换确认消息或切换命令，目标节点接收到第一通知消息后，确认对感知目标的感知方式由第一感知方式切换为第二感知方式，目标节点可按照第二感知方式对感知目标进行感知测量。
需要说明的是，本申请实施例中，第一设备可以根据反馈消息，从目标候选节点中直接确定或选择目标节点，也就是说，第一设备可基于掌握的信息，从目标候选节点中直接确定出能够满足感知需求或感知QoS要求的目标节点。
在一些实施例中，所述第一设备与所述源节点相同；
所述M个目标节点中的一者为所述源节点，或者，所述M个目标节点均不为所述源节点。
需要说明的是，第一设备确定的目标节点的数量可以是1(适用于源节点仍作为目标 节点的情况)，也可以是2(适用于源节点不再作为目标节点的情况)，还可以是大于2(适用于多对感知节点协作对感知目标进行第二感知的情况，即A1发B1收，A2发B2收)。
在一些实施例中，所述第一通知消息包括第二参数配置信息，所述第二参数配置信息用于指示所述目标节点对所述感知目标进行感知测量的感知参数配置信息。
第二参数配置信息可以理解为第一设备推荐的感知参数配置信息，第二参数配置信息包含的信息可以与第一参数配置信息相同，为避免重复，对此不作赘述。
需要说明的是，在存在多个参数配置信息的情况下，例如，存在前述的第一参数配置信息，以及上述第二参数配置信息的情况下，目标节点在对感知目标进行感知测量时，可以基于第二参数配置信息进行感知测量，也可以基于第一参数配置信息进行感知测量，还可以分别基于第一参数配置信息和第二参数配置信息的一部分进行感知测量。
在一些实施例中，所述方法还包括：
所述第一设备向所述M个目标节点发送第一信息，所述第一信息包括如下至少一项：
所述源节点对所述感知目标的感知测量量的历史测量值；
所述源节点对所述感知目标的历史感知结果；
所述感知目标的指示信息；
所述感知目标所在感知区域的先验信息。
在感知方式切换前，第一信息中的感知测量量可以与感知切换完成后的感知测量量相同或不同。第一设备在确定目标节点后，通过向目标节点发送第一信息，有助于辅助目标节点对感知目标进行感知测量，能够进一步提升感知性能。
在一些实施例中，所述第一设备与所述源节点不同，所述方法还包括：
所述第一设备向所述源节点发送第二通知消息，所述第二通知消息用于指示所述源节点停止采用所述第一感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量。
第二通知消息又可称为结束命令，在源节点不再参与切换后的感知操作(即目标节点不包括源节点)的情况下，第一设备通过向源节点发送第二通知消息，使源节点在接收到第二通知消息后，停止采用第一感知方式对感知目标进行感知测量，这样能够降低源节点的电量损耗。
而对于源节点来说，如果其不再作为目标节点进行第二感知，其在接收到第二通知消息后，可以停止对感知目标进行第一感知，并释放感知所占用的资源，例如时频资源、天线端口资源等。如果其仍作为目标节点进行第二感知，其在接收到第二通知消息后，可以仅停止对感知目标进行第一感知，而无需释放感知所占的资源。
此外，第一设备向源节点发送第二通知消息的时机可以有多种选择，例如，第一设备一旦确定了目标节点，即可向源节点发送第二通知消息，而无需考虑感知切换是否成功。该种方式对应的感知切换模式可称为硬切换模式。
在一些实施例中，所述第一设备向所述源节点发送第二通知消息，包括：
所述第一设备在接收到第三通知消息的情况下，向所述源节点发送所述第二通知消息， 所述第三通知消息用于指示所述目标节点采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行了至少一次感知测量，并获得至少一个感知测量量的测量值或至少一个感知结果。
第三通知消息又可称为切换成功消息，用于指示目标节点成功采用第二感知方式对感知目标进行了感知测量，例如，至少一次感知测量，并获得至少一个感知测量量的测量值或至少一个感知结果。
该实施方式中，第一设备向源节点发送第二通知消息的时机是在切换成功之后，该种方式对应的感知切换模式可称为软切换模式。
对于前述的硬切换模式，由于源节点可以尽快结束可靠性较差的第一感知，因此，能够避免源节点进行不必要的感知操作而带来的电能损耗。对于软切换模式，能够更好地维持对感知目标感知的连续性。
在一些实施例中，所述第一设备与所述源节点相同，所述方法还包括：
所述第一设备停止采用所述第一感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量。
相应的，第一设备停止采用第一感知方式对感知目标进行感知测量的时机可以有多种选择，例如，第一设备一旦确定了目标节点，即可向源节点发送第二通知消息，而无需考虑感知切换是否成功。该种方式对应的感知切换模式可称为硬切换模式。
在一些实施例中，所述第一设备停止采用所述第一感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量，包括：
所述第一设备在接收到第四通知消息的情况下，停止采用所述第一感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量，所述第四通知消息用于指示所述目标节点采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行了至少一次感知测量，并获得至少一个感知测量量的测量值或至少一个感知结果。
第四通知消息又可称为切换成功消息，用于指示目标节点成功采用第二感知方式对感知目标进行了感知测量，例如，至少一次感知测量，并获得至少一个感知测量量的测量值或至少一个感知结果。
该实施方式中，第一设备停止采用第一感知方式对感知目标进行感知测量的时机是在切换成功之后，该种方式对应的感知切换模式可称为软切换模式。
需要说明的是，第一请求消息中还可以包括软切换请求，且如果目标候选节点同意并支持软切换，第一参数配置信息还可以包括软切换参数配置信息，软切换参数配置信息可理解为在采用软切换模式的情况下，目标节点对感知目标进行感知测量的感知参数配置信息。
额外的，如果目标节点同意并支持软切换，目标节点也可以在第二参数配置信息携带软切换参数配置信息。
在一些实施例中，所述第一设备根据所述反馈消息，从所述目标候选节点中确定M个目标节点之后，所述方法还包括：
所述第一设备向所述目标候选节点中除所述目标节点之外的目标候选节点发送第四 通知消息，所述第五通知消息用于指示在接收到所述第五通知消息之后，取消对感知目标进行感知测量。
考虑到在确定目标节点后，除目标节点之外的目标候选节点无需对感知目标进行感知操作，因此，通过第五通知消息通知这些目标候选节点取消对感知目标进行感知测量，能够避免这些目标候选节点进行不必要的感知操作而带来的电能损耗。
在移动通信网络中进行感知方式切换，分为第一感知方式切换至第二感知方式、第二感知方式切换至第一感知方式两种情况。图2a示出了第一感知方式切换至第二感知方式的情况，图2b示出了第二感知方式切换至第一感知方式的情况。考虑到切换前后网络中的感知节点可能发生改变，以及切换后感知节点可能是网络侧设备或者UE，上述两种切换情况中每种情况具有6种组合。图2c示出了上述两种切换情况中每种情况的6种组合，其中，网络侧设备为基站，为了表示感知节点可能为不同设备，使用基站A、基站B、基站C，UE A、UE B、UE C加以区分。图2c中，核心网节点可以是核心网中具备感知网络功能的感知功能网元。
本申请实施例中，是由第一感知方式切换至第二感知方式，基于感知节点类型的不同，由第一感知方式切换至第二感知方式可以包括如下六种切换场景：
切换场景1：网络侧设备的第一感知(简称“基站第一感知”)切换为网络侧设备-终端的第二感知(简称“基站-UE第二感知”)；
切换场景2：网络侧设备的第一感知切换为网络侧设备-网络侧设备的第二感知(简称“基站-基站第二感知”)；
切换场景3：终端的第一感知(简称“UE第一感知”)切换为网络侧设备-终端的第二感知；
切换场景4：终端的第一感知切换为终端-终端的第二感知(简称“UE-UE第二感知”)；
切换场景5：网络侧设备的第一感知切换为终端-终端的第二感知；
切换场景6：终端的第一感知切换为网络侧设备-网络侧设备的第二感知。
为了更好地理解本申请，以下基于不同的切换场景进行详细说明。
切换场景1：基站第一感知切换为基站-UE第二感知，具体包括以下流程。
步骤11：网络侧设备执行切换测量。
核心网节点(例如感知功能网元)向源基站(即执行第一感知的网络侧设备)发送切换测量请求，源基站收到切换测量请求后进行切换测量，并向核心网节点反馈切换测量报告；
或者，源基站主动进行切换测量，获取切换测量报告。可选地，源基站向核心网节点发送切换测量报告。
可选地，在源基站进行切换测量之前，核心网节点可以向源基站发送切换测量所必需的切换测量配置信息。或者，所述切换测量配置信息包含在切换测量请求中。切换测量配置信息可以参照前述说明，在此不再赘述。
可选地，上述步骤11可以基于目标事件触发。该目标事件的内容可以参照前述说明，在此不再赘述。
步骤12：源基站基于切换测量报告，决定是否发起切换。或者，核心网节点根据从源基站获取到的切换测量报告，决定是否发起切换请求。
若不发起切换，后续处理可以是维持或者结束当前第一感知。
若发起切换，核心网节点或源基站决定哪个节点切换为第二感知方式，具体分为以下几种情况之一：
情况1：源基站决定切换为基站-UE第二感知。
源基站向至少一个候选目标基站发送第一请求信息，所述第一请求信息为请求第一请求信息接收方，在感知方式切换完成后进行基站-UE第二感知。
所述候选目标基站向至少一个候选目标UE发送第二请求信息，所述第二请求信息为请求第二请求信息接收方，在感知方式切换完成后进行基站-UE第二感知。
可选地，源基站向核心网节点发送第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息通知第一指示信息接收方，在感知方式切换后进行基站-UE第二感知。
情况2：核心网节点决定切换为基站-UE第二感知。
核心网节点向至少一个候选目标基站发送第一请求信息。
候选目标基站向至少一个候选目标UE发送第二请求信息。
可选地，核心网节点向源基站发送第一指示信息。
可选地，所述候选目标基站包括源基站。
情况3：源基站决定主动切换为基站-UE第二感知。这种情况下，源基站为候选目标基站。
源基站向至少一个候选目标UE发送第二请求信息。
可选地，源基站向核心网节点发送第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息指示第二指示信息接收方，在感知方式切换完成后第二指示信息发送方执行第二感知。
可选地，情况3还包含情况1，情况1中的至少一个候选目标基站为除源基站之外的其他候选目标基站。
可选地，源基站或核心网节点在第一请求信息和/或第二请求信息中包含建议的第三参数配置信息。所述第三参数配置信息，用于候选目标基站、候选目标UE、目标基站、目标UE中任意至少一者执行第二感知的感知参数配置。
若第一请求信息、第二请求信息中包括软切换请求，可选地，第三参数配置信息包括软切换对应的参数配置信息。
上述候选目标基站的确定可基于以下信息中的至少一项：
1)基站的位置信息；
2)基站天线面板朝向信息；
3)基站的感知能力信息(包括基站感知覆盖范围、可用于感知的最大带宽、感知业 务最大可持续时间、所能支持的感知信号类型及帧格式和基站天线阵列信息(如阵列类型、天线数、阵列孔径、天线极化特性、阵元增益、方向性特性等)中的至少一项)；
4)基站当前可用于进行感知的资源信息(包括时间资源(符号数、时隙数、帧数等)、RB数、RE数、总带宽、可用频段位置等)、天线资源(天线/天线子阵列数)、相位调制资源(硬件移相器数)和正交码资源(正交码长度和数量)中的至少一项)；
5)基站的信道状态信息(包括至少一个通信链路的信道传输函数/信道冲激响应、CQI、PMI、CSI-RS资源指示、SSB资源指示、LI、RI和L1-RSRP中的至少一项)。
上述候选目标UE的确定可基于以下信息中的至少一项：
1)UE的位置信息；
2)UE天线面板朝向信息；
3)UE的状态信息(包括移动速度、移动方向、保持静止/运动的时间段等信息)；
4)UE的感知能力信息(包括UE感知覆盖范围、可用于感知的最大带宽、感知业务最大可持续时间、所能支持的感知信号类型及帧格式和UE天线阵列信息(阵列类型、天线数、阵列孔径、天线极化特性、阵元增益、方向性特性等)中的至少一项)；
5)UE当前可用于进行感知的资源信息(包括时间资源(符号数、时隙数、帧数等)、RB数、RE数、总带宽、可用频段位置等)、天线资源(天线/天线子阵列数)、相位调制资源(硬件移相器数)和正交码资源(正交码长度和数量)中的至少一项)；
6)UE的信道状态信息(包括至少一个通信链路的信道传输函数/信道冲激响应、CQI、PMI、CSI-RS资源指示、SSB资源指示、LI、RI和L1-RSRP中的至少一项)。
上述第一请求信息还包括以下信息中的至少一项：
1)感知需求(指示包括感知目标区域/对象类型、所需感知功能、感知目的、感知结果等)；
2)感知QoS(包括以下至少一项：感知分辨率(进一步可分为：测距分辨率、测角分辨率、测速分辨率、成像分辨率)等，感知精度(进一步可分为：测距精度、测角精度、测速精度、定位精度等)，感知范围(进一步可分为：测距范围、测速范围、测角范围、成像范围等)，感知时延(从感知信号发送到获得感知结果的时间间隔，或，从感知需求发起到获取感知结果的时间间隔)，感知更新速率(相邻两次执行感知并获得感知结果的时间间隔)，检测概率(在感知对象存在的情况下被正确检测出来的概率)，虚警概率(在感知对象不存在的情况下错误检测出感知目标的概率)，感知安全性，感知隐私性)；
3)感知测量量；
4)感知测量结果(包括基于至少一种感知测量量直接或间接得到的感知结果)；
5)感知条件(包括感知开始时间、感知结束时间、感知持续时间等至少一项)；
6)感知目标或感知区域先验信息(包括感知目标类型、感知目标所在大致位置/区域、感知目标历史状态(速度、角度、距离、加速度、空间朝向)中的至少一项)；
7)感知方式切换成功判决条件(例如，指示至少一种感知测量量和/或通信测量量的 测量结果在预设时间内/预设次数下达到预设门限)。
上述第二请求信息还包括以下信息中的至少一项：同第一请求信息。
步骤13：候选目标基站、候选目标UE决定是否接受在切换感知方式后执行第一感知。分为以下两种情况：
情况一：候选目标基站、候选目标UE同意切换。则依次执行以下流程：
13-1)候选目标UE向第二请求信息发送方(候选目标基站或源基站)发送第二应答信息，所述第二应答信息指示第二请求信息发送方，在感知方式切换完成后，第二应答信息发送方同意执行第一感知。
13-2)候选目标基站收到候选目标UE发送的第二应答信息后，向第一请求信息发送方(源基站或核心网节点)发送第一应答信息，所述第一应答信息指示第一请求信息发送方，在感知方式切换完成后，第一应答信息发送方同意执行第一感知。
可选地，第一应答信息内容包括第二应答信息内容。
可选地，候选目标基站在第一应答信息中反馈建议的第一参数配置信息。所述第一参数配置信息可以理解为候选目标基站推荐的感知参数配置信息，用于候选目标感知节点执行第一感知的感知参数配置。第一参数配置信息可以用于配置以下至少一项：
波形类型，例如OFDM、SC-FDMA、OTFS、FMCW和脉冲信号中的至少一项；
子载波间隔，例如OFDM系统的子载波间隔，如30KHz；
保护间隔，例如从信号结束发送时刻到该信号的最迟回波信号被接收的时刻之间的时间间隔，该参数正比于最大感知距离，例如可以通过2dmax/c计算得到，其中，dmax表示最大感知距离(属于感知需求)，对于自发自收的感知信号，dmax表示感知信号收发点到信号发射点的最大距离，在某些情况下，OFDM信号CP可以用于指示最小保护间隔；
带宽，该参数反比于距离分辨率，可以通过c/(2Δd)得到，其中，Δd表示距离分辨率(属于感知需求)，c表示光速；
突发(burst)持续时间，该参数反比于速率分辨率(属于感知需求)，该参数是感知信号的时间跨度，主要为了计算多普勒频偏，该参数可通过c/(2fcΔv)计算得到，其中，Δv表示速度分辨率，fc表示感知信号的载频；
时域间隔，该参数可通过c/(2fcvrange)计算得到，其中，vrange表示最大速率减去最小速度(属于感知需求)，该参数是相邻的两个感知信号之间的时间间隔；
发送信号功率，例如从-20dBm到23dBm每隔2dBm取一个值；
信号格式，例如是SRS、DMRS、PRS等，或者其他预定义的信号，以及相关的序列格式等信息；
信号方向，例如感知信号的方向或者波束信息；
时间资源，例如感知信号所在的时隙索引或者时隙的符号索引，其中，时间资源分为两种，一种是一次性的时间资源，例如一个符号发送一个全向的感知信号；一种是非一次性的时间资源，例如多组周期性的时间资源或者不连续的时间资源(可包含开始时间和结 束时间)，每一组周期性的时间资源发送同一方向的感知信号，不同组的周期性时间资源上的波束方向不同；
频率资源，包括感知信号的中心频点、带宽、RB或者子载波、参考点A、起始带宽位置等；
QCL关系，例如感知信号包括多个资源，每个资源与一个SSB QCL，QCL包括Type A、Type B、Type C或者Type D；
天线配置信息。
可选地，候选目标UE在第二应答信息中反馈建议的第二参数配置信息。所述第二参数配置信息，用于候选目标感知节点执行第一感知的感知参数配置。
可选地，第一参数配置信息内容包括第二参数配置信息内容。
若第一请求信息中包括软切换请求，且候选目标基站同意并支持软切换，可选地，第一参数配置信息包括软切换参数配置信息。
若第二请求信息中包括软切换请求，且候选目标UE同意并支持软切换，可选地，第二参数配置信息包括软切换参数配置信息。
情况二：候选目标基站、候选目标UE至少一者不同意切换：
可选地，候选目标基站向第一请求信息发送方(源基站或核心网节点)发送第一拒绝信息，所述第一拒绝信息指示第一请求信息发送方，第一拒绝信息发送方不进行第一感知。
可选地，候选目标UE向第二请求信息发送方(源基站或候选目标基站)发送第二拒绝信息，所述第二拒绝信息指示第二请求信息发送方，第二拒绝信息发送方不进行第一感知。
后续处理可以是以下其中一项：源基站重新确定候选目标UE；候选目标基站重新确定候选目标UE；源基站或核心网节点重新确定候选目标基站，候选目标基站确定候选目标UE；取消切换，维持当前第二感知；结束当前第二感知。
步骤14：源基站或核心网节点确定执行第一感知的感知节点。分为以下两种情况：
情况1：源基站或核心网节点确定目标基站，目标基站确定目标UE。
源基站或核心网节点基于收到的第一应答信息，在候选目标基站中确定至少一个目标基站，作为切换后执行第一感知的感知节点。
源基站或核心网节点向目标基站发送切换命令。所述切换命令用于通知目标感知节点执行第一感知操作。
所述目标基站收到第一切换命令后，在候选目标UE中确定至少一个目标UE，作为切换后执行第一感知的感知节点。进一步地，目标基站向目标UE发送切换命令。
情况2：源基站或核心网节点同时确定目标基站以及目标UE。
源基站或核心网节点基于收到的第一应答信息，在候选目标基站中确定至少一个目标基站，以及至少一个目标UE，作为切换后执行第一感知的感知节点。
源基站或核心网节点向目标基站发送切换命令，目标基站向目标UE发送切换命令。
可选地，源基站或核心网节点在切换命令中反馈建议的第三参数配置信息。所述第三参数配置信息，用于目标感知节点执行第一感知的感知参数配置。
所述第三参数配置信息包括以下至少一项：同第一参数配置信息。
可选地，第三参数配置信息包括软切换参数配置信息。
步骤15：目标基站、目标UE执行第一感知业务。具体地，执行以下两种操作：
操作一：采用软切换方法。目标基站、目标UE基于第一请求信息、第一参数配置信息、第二参数配置信息、第三参数配置信息中的至少一项，进行感知参数配置，执行第一感知。
在目标基站或目标UE获得至少一次感知测量量的测量值和/或感知结果后，目标基站向源基站或核心网节点发送切换成功消息。
进一步地，包括以下几种情况之一：
1)第一请求信息发送方为源基站，源基站和目标基站不是同一设备：
源基站收到切换成功消息后，结束原有感知操作，释放感知所占用的资源(包括时频资源、天线端口资源等)；
2)第一请求信息发送方为核心网节点，源基站和目标基站不是同一设备：
核心网节点收到切换成功消息后，核心网节点向源基站发送第一结束命令。源基站结束原有感知操作，并释放感知所占用的资源(包括时频资源、天线端口资源等)；
3)第一请求信息发送方为核心网节点，源基站和目标基站是同一设备：
核心网节点收到切换成功消息后，向源基站发送第二结束命令。源基站结束原有感知操作；
4)源基站主动作为目标基站：
切换成功后，源基站主动结束原有感知操作。
操作二：采用硬切换方法。执行步骤14的同时，源基站或核心网节点无需等待切换成功消息。包括以下几种情况之一：
1)第一请求信息发送方为源基站，源基站和目标基站不是同一设备：
源基站结束原有感知操作，释放感知所占用的资源(包括时频资源、天线端口资源等)；
2)第一请求信息发送方为核心网节点，源基站和目标基站不是同一设备：
核心网节点向源基站发送第一结束命令。源基站结束原有感知操作，释放感知所占用的资源(包括时频资源、天线端口资源等)；
3)第一请求信息发送方为核心网节点，源基站和目标基站是同一设备：
源基站主动结束原有感知操作；
4)源基站主动作为目标基站：
源基站主动结束原有感知操作。
可选地，源基站或核心网节点将部分或全部感知测量量的历史测量值和/或历史感知结果、感知目标/区域先验信息发送给目标UE。这里，感知方式切换前的感知测量量可以 与感知方式切换后的感知测量量相同或者不同。
切换场景2：基站第一感知切换为基站-基站第二感知，具体包括以下流程。
步骤21：与步骤11相同，在此不再赘述。
步骤22：源基站基于切换测量报告，决定是否发起切换。
或者，核心网节点根据从源基站获取到的切换测量报告，决定是否发起切换请求。
若不发起切换，后续处理可以是维持或者结束当前第一感知。
若发起切换，核心网节点或源基站决定是哪个节点切换为第一感知方式，具体分为以下几种情况之一：
情况1：源基站决定切换为基站-基站第一感知。
源基站向至少两个候选目标基站发送第三请求信息，所述第三请求信息为请求第三请求信息接收方，在感知方式切换完成后进行基站-基站第一感知。
可选地，源基站向核心网节点发送第三指示信息，所述第三指示信息通知第一指示信息接收方，在感知方式切换后进行基站-基站第一感知。
情况2：核心网节点决定切换为基站-基站第一感知。
核心网节点向至少两个候选目标基站发送第三请求信息。
可选地，核心网节点向源基站发送第三指示信息。
所述候选目标基站包括源基站。
情况3：源基站决定主动切换为基站-基站第一感知。这种情况下，源基站为候选目标基站。
源基站向至少一个候选目标基站发送第三请求信息。
可选地，源基站向核心网节点发送第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息指示第二指示信息接收方，在感知方式切换完成后第二指示信息发送方执行第一感知。
可选地，所述第三请求信息可以包括软切换请求。
所述第三请求信息还包括以下信息中的至少一项：同第一请求信息。
步骤23：候选目标基站决定是否接受在切换感知方式后执行第一感知。分为以下两种情况：
情况一：候选目标基站同意切换。
候选目标基站向第一请求信息发送方(源基站或核心网节点)发送第一应答信息。
可选地，候选目标基站在第一应答信息中反馈建议的第一参数配置信息。
若第一请求信息中包括软切换请求，且候选目标基站同意并支持软切换，可选地，第一参数配置信息包括软切换参数配置信息。
情况二：候选目标基站不同意切换。
可选地，候选目标基站向第一请求信息发送方(源基站或核心网节点)发送第一拒绝信息。
后续处理可以是以下其中一项：源基站或核心网节点重新确定候选目标基站；取消切 换，维持当前第二感知；结束当前第二感知。
步骤24：源基站或核心网节点确定执行第一感知的感知节点。
源基站或核心网节点基于收到的第一应答信息，在候选目标基站中确定至少两个目标基站(基站A和基站B)，作为切换后执行第一感知的感知节点。
源基站或核心网节点向目标基站发送切换命令。
所述目标基站包括源基站。
可选地，源基站或核心网节点在切换命令中反馈建议的第三参数配置信息。
所述第三参数配置信息包括以下至少一项：同第一参数配置信息。
可选地，第三参数配置信息包括软切换参数配置信息。
步骤25：目标基站(基站A、基站B)执行第一感知。具体地，后续处理分为以下两种情况：
情况一：采用软切换方法。目标基站(基站A、基站B)基于第一请求信息、第一参数配置信息、第二参数配置信息、第三参数配置信息中的至少一项，进行感知参数配置，执行第一感知。
在目标基站获得至少一次感知测量量的测量值和/或感知结果后，目标基站向源基站或核心网节点发送切换成功消息。
进一步地，包括以下几种情况之一：
1)第三请求信息发送方为源基站，源基站和目标基站不是同一设备：
源基站收到切换成功消息后，结束原有感知操作，释放感知所占用的资源(包括时频资源、天线端口资源等)；
2)第三请求信息发送方为核心网节点，源基站和目标基站不是同一设备：
核心网节点收到切换成功消息后，核心网节点向源基站发送第一结束命令。源基站收到第一结束命令后，结束原有感知操作，并释放感知所占用的资源(包括时频资源、天线端口资源等)；
3)第三请求信息发送方为核心网节点，源基站和目标基站是同一设备：
核心网节点收到切换成功消息后，向源基站发送第二结束命令。源基站结束原有感知操作；
4)源基站主动作为目标基站(基站A或基站B)：
切换成功后，源基站主动结束原有感知操作。
情况二：采用硬切换方法。执行步骤24的同时，源基站或核心网节点无需等待切换成功消息。包括以下几种情况之一：
1)第三请求信息发送方为源基站，源基站和目标基站不是同一设备：
源基站结束原有感知操作，释放感知所占用的资源(包括时频资源、天线端口资源等)；
2)第三请求信息发送方为核心网节点，源基站和目标基站不是同一设备：
核心网节点向源基站发送第一结束命令。源基站结束原有感知操作，释放感知所占用 的资源(包括时频资源、天线端口资源等)；
3)第三请求信息发送方为核心网节点，源基站和目标基站是同一设备：
源基站主动结束原有感知操作；
4)源基站主动作为目标基站：
源基站主动结束原有感知操作。
可选地，源基站或核心网节点将部分或全部感知测量量的历史测量值和/或历史感知结果、感知目标/区域先验信息发送给目标基站。
切换场景3：UE第一感知切换为基站-UE第二感知，具体包括以下流程。
步骤31：网络侧设备执行切换测量。
源终端主动发起切换测量，获取切换测量报告，可选地，源终端向源接入基站(即源终端的接入基站)和/或核心网节点发送切换测量报告；
或者，源接入基站向源终端发送切换测量请求，源终端收到切换测量请求后进行切换测量，并向源接入基站反馈切换测量报告；可选地，源接入基站向核心网节点发送切换测量报告；
或者，核心网节点(例如感知功能网元)向源终端发送切换测量请求，源终端收到切换测量请求后进行切换测量，并向核心网节点反馈切换测量报告；可选地，核心网节点向源接入基站发送切换测量报告。
可选地，在源终端进行切换测量之前，源接入基站或核心网节点向源终端发送切换测量所必需的切换测量配置信息。或者，所述切换测量配置信息包含在切换测量请求中。
其中，切换测量配置信息包含的内容可以参照上述实施例，在此不再赘述。
可选地，上述步骤31可以基于目标事件触发。该目标事件的内容可以参照上述实施例在此不再赘述。
步骤32：源接入基站或核心网节点基于切换测量报告，决定是否发起切换。
若不发起切换，后续处理可以是维持或者结束当前第一感知(即按照第一感知方式执行的感知操作)。
若发起切换，核心网节点、源接入基站、源UE中任意一者，决定是哪个节点切换为第一感知方式，具体分为以下几种情况：
情况1：源接入基站决定切换为基站-UE第二感知。
源接入基站向至少一个候选目标基站发送第一请求信息。
所述候选目标基站向至少一个候选目标UE发送第二请求信息。
可选地，源接入基站向核心网节点发送第一指示信息。
情况2：核心网节点决定切换为基站-UE第二感知。
核心网节点向至少一个候选目标基站发送第一请求信息。
所述候选目标基站向至少一个候选目标UE发送第二请求信息。
可选地，核心网节点向源接入基站发送第一指示信息。
所述候选目标基站包括源接入基站。
情况3：源UE决定主动切换为基站-UE第一感知。这种情况下，源UE为候选目标UE。
源UE向源接入基站和/或核心网节点发送第二指示信息。
源接入基站或核心网节点向至少一个候选目标基站发送第一请求信息。
所述候选目标基站向包括源UE在内的至少一个候选目标UE发送第二请求信息。
所述候选目标基站包括源接入基站。
可选地，源接入基站或核心网节点在第一请求信息和/或第二请求信息中包含建议的第三参数配置信息。第三参数配置信息的具体内容可以参照上述实施例在此不再赘述。
步骤33：候选目标基站、候选目标UE决定是否接受在切换感知方式后执行第一感知。分为以下两种情况：
情况一：候选目标基站、候选目标UE同意切换。则依次执行以下流程：
33-1)候选目标基站、候选目标UE基于第一请求信息、第二请求信息和第三参数配置信息至少一项，进行感知参数配置，执行第二感知。
33-2)在进行至少一次感知测量后，候选目标基站向源接入基站或核心网节点发送第一应答信息。第一应答消息的内容可以参照上述实施例在此不再赘述。
33-3)源接入基站或核心网节点在预设时间内等待候选目标基站的第一应答信息，一旦收到某个候选目标基站发送的第一应答信息满足目标切换条件，则立即选择该候选目标基站以及与其共同进行第二感知的候选目标UE，作为切换后执行第二感知的感知节点。所述共同进行第二感知的候选目标UE，为发送满足目标切换条件的第二应答信息的UE。
情况二：候选目标基站、候选目标UE至少一者不同意切换。
可选地，候选目标基站向第一请求信息的发送方(源基站或核心网节点)发送第一拒绝信息，所述第一拒绝信息第一指示信息的发送方，第一拒绝信息的发送方不进行第二感知。
可选地，候选目标UE向第二请求信息的发送方(源基站或候选目标基站)发送第二拒绝信息，所述第二拒绝信息第二指示信息的发送方，第二拒绝信息的发送方不进行第二感知。
若在预设等待时间内没有候选目标基站、候选目标UE同意进行第二感知，后续处理可以是以下其中一项：源基站重新确定候选目标UE；候选目标基站重新确定候选目标UE；源基站或核心网节点重新确定候选目标基站，候选目标基站确定候选目标UE；取消切换，维持当前第一感知；结束当前第一感知。
步骤34：源基站或核心网节点确定执行第一感知的感知节点。分为以下两种情况：
情况1：源基站或核心网节点确定目标基站，目标基站确定目标UE。
源基站或核心网节点基于收到的第一应答信息，在候选目标基站中确定至少一个目标基站，作为切换后执行第一感知的感知节点。
源基站或核心网节点向目标基站发送切换命令。
所述目标基站收到第一切换命令后，在候选目标UE中确定至少一个目标UE，作为切换后执行第一感知的感知节点。进一步地，目标基站向目标UE发送切换命令。
情况2：源基站或核心网节点同时确定目标基站以及目标UE。
源基站或核心网节点基于收到的第一应答信息，在候选目标基站中确定至少一个目标基站，以及至少一个目标UE，作为切换后执行第一感知的感知节点。
源基站或核心网节点向目标基站发送切换命令，目标基站向目标UE发送切换命令。
可选地，源基站或核心网节点在切换命令中反馈建议的第三参数配置信息。
所述第三参数配置信息包括以下至少一项：同第一参数配置信息。
可选地，第三参数配置信息包括软切换参数配置信息。
步骤35：目标基站、目标UE执行第一感知业务。具体地，具体地，后续处理分为以下两种情况：
情况一：采用软切换方法。目标基站、目标UE基于第一请求信息、第一参数配置信息、第二参数配置信息、第三参数配置信息中的至少一项，进行感知参数配置，执行第一感知。
在目标基站或目标UE获得至少一次感知测量量的测量值和/或感知结果后，目标基站向源接入基站或核心网节点发送切换成功消息。
进一步地，包括以下几种情况之一：
1)第一请求信息发送方为源接入基站或核心网节点，源UE和目标UE不是同一设备：
源接入基站或核心网节点收到切换成功消息后，向源UE发送第一结束命令，源UE结束原有感知操作，释放感知所占用的资源(包括时频资源、天线端口资源等)；
2)第一请求信息发送方为源接入基站或核心网节点，源UE和目标UE是同一设备：
源接入基站或核心网节点收到切换成功消息后，向源UE发送第二结束命令，源UE结束原有感知操作；
3)源UE主动作为目标UE：
切换成功后，源UE主动结束原有感知操作。
情况二：采用硬切换方法。执行步骤34的同时，源基站或核心网节点无需等待切换成功消息。包括以下几种情况之一：
1)第一请求信息发送方为源接入基站或核心网节点，源UE和目标UE不是同一设备：
源接入基站或核心网节点向源UE发送第一结束命令，源UE结束原有感知操作，释放感知所占用的资源(包括时频资源、天线端口资源等)；
2)第一请求信息发送方为源接入基站或核心网节点，源UE和目标UE是同一设备：
源接入基站或核心网节点向源UE发送第二结束命令，源UE结束原有感知操作；
3)源UE主动作为目标UE：
源UE主动结束原有感知操作。
可选地，源UE或源接入基站或核心网节点将部分或全部感知测量量的历史测量值和/或历史感知结果、感知目标/区域先验信息发送给目标UE。
切换场景4：UE第一感知切换为UE-UE第二感知，具体包括以下流程。
步骤41：同上述步骤31，在此不再赘述。
步骤42：源接入基站或核心网节点基于切换测量报告，决定是否发起切换。
若不发起切换，后续处理可以是维持或者结束当前第一感知(即按照第一感知方式执行的感知操作)。
若发起切换，核心网节点、源接入基站、源UE中任意一者，决定是哪个节点切换为第一感知方式，具体分为以下几种情况之一：
情况1：源接入基站决定切换为UE-UE第二感知。可以通过下述方法中至少一种：
(1)源接入基站向至少一个候选目标接入基站(即候选目标UE的接入基站)发送请求消息A，所述请求消息A为请求请求消息A接收方，在感知方式切换完成后进行UE-UE第二感知。所述候选目标接入基站向至少两个候选目标UE发送第二请求信息，所述第二请求信息为请求第二请求信息接收方，在感知方式切换完成后进行UE-UE第二感知。
(2)源接入基站向至少两个候选目标UE发送第二请求信息。
可选地，源接入基站向核心网节点发送第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息通知第一指示信息接收方，在感知方式切换后执行UE-UE第二感知。
情况2：核心网节点决定切换为UE-UE第二感知。
核心网节点向至少一个候选目标接入基站发送第一请求信息。
所述候选目标接入基站向至少一个候选目标UE发送第二请求信息。
可选地，核心网节点向源接入基站发送第一指示信息。
所述候选目标接入基站包括源接入基站。
情况3：源UE决定主动切换为UE-UE第二感知。这种情况下，源UE为候选目标UE。
源UE向源接入基站和/或核心网节点发送第二指示信息。
源接入基站或核心网节点向至少一个候选目标接入基站发送第一请求信息。
所述候选目标接入基站向包括源UE在内的至少两个候选目标UE发送第二请求信息。
所述候选目标接入基站包括源接入基站。
可选地，源接入基站或核心网节点在第一请求信息和/或第二请求信息中包含建议的第三参数配置信息。第三参数配置信息的具体内容可以参照上述实施例在此不再赘述。
步骤43：候选目标UE决定是否接受在切换感知方式后执行第一感知。分为以下两种情况：
情况一：候选目标UE同意切换。则依次执行以下流程：
43-1)候选目标UE基于第一请求信息和第三参数配置信息至少一项，进行感知参数 配置，执行第二感知。
43-2)在进行至少一次感知测量后，候选目标UE向源接入基站或核心网节点发送第一应答信息。其中可以通过：候选目标UE向候选目标接入基站发送第一应答信息，所述候选目标接入基站向源接入基站或核心网节点转发第一应答信息。
43-3)源接入基站或核心网节点在预设时间内等待候选目标接入基站的第一应答信息，一旦收到某个候选目标接入基站发送的第一应答信息满足目标切换条件，则立即选择该候选目标接入基站接入的、对应发送第一应答信息的候选目标UE，作为切换后执行第一感知的感知节点。
情况二：候选目标UE不同意切换。
可选地，候选目标UE不同意切换。则可选地，候选目标UE向第四请求信息发送方(源接入基站或核心网节点)发送第一拒绝信息。其中可以通过：候选目标UE向候选目标接入基站发送第一拒绝信息，所述候选目标接入基站向源接入基站或核心网节点转发第一拒绝信息。
若在预设等待时间内没有候选目标UE同意进行第一感知，后续处理可以是以下其中一项：源接入基站重新确定候选目标UE；候选目标接入基站重新确定候选目标UE；源接入基站或核心网节点重新确定候选目标接入基站，候选目标接入基站确定候选目标UE；取消切换，维持当前第二感知；结束当前第一感知。
步骤44：源接入基站或核心网节点确定执行第一感知的感知节点。
源接入基站或核心网节点基于收到的第一应答信息，在候选目标UE中确定至少两个目标UE(UE A和UE B)，作为切换后执行第一感知的感知节点。
源接入基站或核心网节点向目标UE发送切换命令。
所述目标UE包括源UE。
可选地，源接入基站或核心网节点在切换命令中反馈建议的第三参数配置信息。
所述第三参数配置信息包括以下至少一项：同第一参数配置信息。
可选地，第三参数配置信息包括软切换参数配置信息。
步骤45：目标UE(UE A、UE B)执行第一感知。具体地，后续处理分为以下两种情况：
情况一：采用软切换方法。目标UE(UE A、UE B)基于第一请求信息、第一参数配置信息、第二参数配置信息、第三参数配置信息中的至少一项，进行感知参数配置，执行第一感知。
在目标UE获得至少一次感知测量量的测量值和/或感知结果后，目标UE向源接入基站或核心网节点发送切换成功消息。
进一步地，包括以下几种情况之一：
1)请求信息发送方为源接入基站或核心网节点，源UE和目标UE不是同一设备：
源接入基站或核心网节点收到切换成功消息后，向源UE发送第一结束命令，源UE 结束原有感知操作，释放感知所占用的资源(包括时频资源、天线端口资源等)；
2)请求信息发送方为源接入基站或核心网节点，源UE和目标UE之一是同一设备：
源接入基站或核心网节点收到切换成功消息后，向源UE发送第二结束命令。源基站结束原有感知操作；
4)源UE主动作为目标UE(UE A或UE B)：
切换成功后，源UE主动结束原有感知操作。
情况二：采用硬切换方法。执行步骤44的同时，源基站或核心网节点无需等待切换成功消息。包括以下几种情况之一：
1)请求信息发送方为源接入基站或核心网节点，源UE和目标UE不是同一设备：
源接入基站或核心网节点向源UE发送第一结束命令，源UE结束原有感知操作，释放感知所占用的资源(包括时频资源、天线端口资源等)；
2)请求信息发送方为源接入基站或核心网节点，源UE和目标UE之一是同一设备：
源接入基站或核心网节点向源UE发送第二结束命令。源基站结束原有感知操作；
4)源UE主动作为目标UE(UE A或UE B)：
源UE主动结束原有感知操作。
可选地，源UE或源接入基站或核心网节点将部分或全部感知测量量的历史测量值和/或历史感知结果、感知目标/区域先验信息发送给目标UE。
切换场景5：基站第一感知切换为UE-UE第二感知，具体包括以下流程。
步骤51：同步骤11，在此不再赘述。
步骤52：源基站或核心网节点基于切换测量报告，决定是否发起切换。
若不发起切换，后续处理可以是维持或者结束当前第一感知。
若发起切换，源基站或核心网节点决定是哪个节点切换为第一感知方式，具体分为以下几种情况之一：
情况1：源基站决定切换为UE-UE第一感知。可以通过下述方法中至少一种：
(1)源基站向至少一个候选目标接入基站发送第四请求信息。所述候选目标接入基站向至少两个候选目标UE发送第五请求信息。
(2)源基站向至少两个候选目标UE发送第五请求信息。这种情况下，源基站为候选目标接入基站。
可选地，源基站向核心网节点发送第四指示信息。
情况2：核心网节点决定切换为UE-UE第一感知。
核心网节点向至少一个候选目标接入基站发送第四请求信息。
所述候选目标基站向至少一个候选目标UE发送第五请求信息。
可选地，核心网节点向源基站发送第四指示信息。
所述候选目标接入基站包括源基站。
可选地，所述第四请求信息、第五请求信息可以包括软切换请求。
候选目标基站的确定基于以下信息中的至少一项：同切换场景1。
候选目标UE的确定基于以下信息中的至少一项：同切换场景1。
所述第四请求信息、第五请求信息还包括以下信息中的至少一项：同切换场景1中的第一请求信息。
步骤53：候选目标UE决定是否接受在切换感知方式后执行第一感知。分为以下两种情况：
情况一：候选目标UE同意切换。
候选目标UE向源基站或核心网节点发送第一应答信息。其中可以通过：候选目标UE向候选目标接入基站发送第一应答信息，所述候选目标接入基站向源基站或核心网节点转发第一应答信息。
可选地，候选目标UE在第一应答信息中反馈建议的第一参数配置信息。
所述第一参数配置信息包括以下至少一项：同切换场景1。
若第一请求信息中包括软切换请求，且候选目标UE同意并支持软切换，可选地，第一参数配置信息包括软切换参数配置信息。
情况二：候选目标UE不同意切换。
可选地，候选目标UE向第一请求信息发送方(源基站或核心网节点)发送第一拒绝信息。其中可以通过：候选目标UE向候选目标接入基站发送第一拒绝信息，所述候选目标接入基站向源基站或核心网节点转发第一拒绝信息。
后续处理可以是以下其中一项：源基站重新确定候选目标UE；候选目标接入基站重新确定候选目标UE；源基站或核心网节点重新确定候选目标接入基站，候选目标接入基站确定候选目标UE；取消切换，维持当前第二感知；结束当前第二感知。
步骤54：源基站或核心网节点确定执行第一感知的感知节点。
源基站或核心网节点基于收到的第一应答信息，在候选目标UE中确定至少两个目标UE(UE A和UE B)，作为切换后执行第一感知的感知节点。
源基站或核心网节点向目标UE发送切换命令。其中可以通过：源基站或核心网节点向目标接入基站发送切换命令，目标接入基站向目标UE转发切换命令。
可选地，源基站或核心网节点在切换命令中反馈建议的第三参数配置信息。
所述第三参数配置信息包括以下至少一项：同第一参数配置信息。
可选地，第三参数配置信息包括软切换参数配置信息。
步骤55：目标UE(UE A、UE B)执行第一感知。具体地，后续处理分为以下两种情况：
情况一：采用软切换方法。目标UE(UE A、UE B)基于第一请求信息、第一参数配置信息、第二参数配置信息、第三参数配置信息中的至少一项，进行感知参数配置，执行第一感知。
在目标UE获得至少一次感知测量量的测量量和/或感知结果后，目标UE向源基站或 核心网节点发送切换成功消息。
进一步地，包括以下几种情况之一：
1)请求信息发送方为源基站，源基站和目标接入基站不是同一设备：
源基站收到切换成功消息后，结束原有感知操作，释放感知所占用的资源(包括时频资源、天线端口资源等)；
2)请求信息发送方为核心网节点，源基站和目标接入基站不是同一设备：
核心网节点收到切换成功消息后，向源基站发送第一结束命令，源基站结束原有感知操作，释放感知所占用的资源(包括时频资源、天线端口资源等)；
3)请求信息发送方为源基站，源基站和目标接入基站是同一设备：
源基站收到切换成功消息后，结束原有感知操作；
4)请求信息发送方为核心网节点，源基站和目标接入基站是同一设备：
核心网节点收到切换成功消息后，向源基站发送第二结束命令，源基站结束原有感知操作。
情况二：采用硬切换方法。执行步骤54的同时，源基站或核心网节点无需等待切换成功消息。包括以下几种情况之一：
1)请求信息发送方为源基站，源基站和目标接入基站不是同一设备：
源基站结束原有感知操作，释放感知所占用的资源(包括时频资源、天线端口资源等)；
2)请求信息发送方为核心网节点，源基站和目标接入基站不是同一设备：
核心网节点向源基站发送第一结束命令，源基站结束原有感知操作，释放感知所占用的资源(包括时频资源、天线端口资源等)；
3)请求信息发送方为源基站，源基站和目标接入基站是同一设备：
源基站结束原有感知操作；
4)请求信息发送方为核心网节点，源基站和目标接入基站是同一设备：
核心网节点向源基站发送第二结束命令，源基站结束原有感知操作。
可选地，源UE或源基站或核心网节点将部分或全部感知测量量的历史测量值和/或历史感知结果、感知目标/区域先验信息发送给目标UE(UE A和/或UE B)。
切换场景6：UE第一感知切换为基站-基站第二感知，具体包括以下流程。
步骤61：同步骤31，在此不再赘述。
步骤62：源接入基站或核心网节点基于切换测量报告，决定是否发起切换。
若不发起切换，后续处理可以是维持或者结束当前第一感知。
若发起切换，核心网节点、源接入基站、源UE中任意一者，决定是哪个节点切换为第一感知方式，具体分为以下几种情况之一：
情况1：源接入基站决定切换为基站-基站第一感知。
源接入基站向至少两个候选目标基站发送第三请求信息。
可选地，源接入基站向核心网节点发送第三指示信息。
情况2：核心网节点决定切换为基站-基站第一感知。
核心网节点向至少两个候选目标基站发送第三请求信息。
可选地，核心网节点向源接入基站发送第三指示信息。
所述候选目标基站包括源接入基站。
情况3：源接入基站决定主动切换为基站-基站第一感知。这种情况下，源接入基站为候选目标基站。
源接入基站向核心网节点发送第二指示信息。
源接入基站或核心网节点向至少一个候选目标基站发送第三请求信息。
可选地，所述第三请求信息可以包括软切换请求。
候选目标基站的确定基于以下信息中的至少一项：同切换场景1。
所述第三请求信息还包括以下信息中的至少一项：同切换场景1中的第一请求信息。
步骤63：候选目标基站决定是否接受在切换感知方式后执行第一感知。分为以下两种情况：
情况一：候选目标基站同意切换。
候选目标基站向第一请求信息发送方(源接入基站或核心网节点)发送第一应答信息。
可选地，候选目标基站在第一应答信息中反馈建议的第一参数配置信息。
所述第一参数配置信息包括以下至少一项：同切换场景1。
若第一请求信息中包括软切换请求，且候选目标基站同意并支持软切换，可选地，第一参数配置信息包括软切换参数配置信息。
情况二：候选目标基站不同意切换。
可选地，候选目标基站向第一请求信息发送方(源接入基站或核心网节点)发送第一拒绝信息。
后续处理可以是以下其中一项：源接入基站或核心网节点重新确定候选目标基站；取消切换，维持当前第一感知；结束当前第一感知。
步骤64：源接入基站或核心网节点确定执行第一感知的感知节点。
源接入基站或核心网节点基于收到的第一应答信息，在候选目标基站中确定至少两个目标基站(基站A和基站B)，作为切换后执行第一感知的感知节点。
源接入基站或核心网节点向目标基站发送切换命令。
所述目标基站包括源接入基站。
可选地，源接入基站或核心网节点在切换命令中反馈建议的第三参数配置信息。
所述第三参数配置信息包括以下至少一项：同第一参数配置信息。
可选地，第三参数配置信息包括软切换参数配置信息。
步骤65：目标基站(基站A、基站B)执行第一感知。具体地，后续处理分为以下两种情况：
情况一：采用软切换方法。目标基站(基站A、基站B)基于第一请求信息、第一参 数配置信息、第二参数配置信息、第三参数配置信息中的至少一项，进行感知参数配置，执行第一感知。
在目标基站获得至少一次感知测量量的测量值和/或感知结果后，目标基站向源接入基站或核心网节点发送切换成功消息。
源接入基站或核心网节点收到切换成功消息后，向源UE发送第一结束命令，源UE结束原有感知操作，释放感知所占用的资源(包括时频资源、天线端口资源等)。
情况二：采用硬切换方法。执行步骤4的同时，源接入基站或核心网节点无需等待切换成功消息。
源接入基站或核心网节点向源UE发送第一结束命令。源UE结束原有感知操作，释放感知所占用的资源(包括时频资源、天线端口资源等)。
可选地，源UE或源接入基站或核心网节点将部分或全部历史感知测量量的测量值和/或历史感知结果、感知目标/区域先验信息发送给目标基站。
综上，在感知节点采用第一感知方式对感知目标进行感知测量的场景下，通过发起对感知目标的感知方式由第一感知方式切换到第二感知方式，使得感知测量能够以合适的感知方式进行，从而能够提高感知测量的可靠性。
本申请实施例提供的感知方式切换方法，执行主体可以为感知方式切换装置。本申请实施例中以感知方式切换装置执行感知方式切换方法为例，说明本申请实施例提供的感知方式切换的装置。
参照图3，本申请实施例还提供了一种感知方式切换装置，可应用于第一设备。如图3所示，该感知方式切换装置300包括：
获取模块301，用于获取第一测量报告，所述第一测量报告由源节点采用第一感知方式对感知目标进行第一感知测量而生成，所述第一感知方式的信号发送节点和所述第一感知方式的信号接收节点为同一节点，第一设备与所述源节点相同或不同；
第一确定模块302，用于根据所述第一测量报告，确定是否发起对所述感知目标的感知方式由所述第一感知方式切换为第二感知方式，所述第二感知方式的信号发送节点和所述第二感知方式的信号接收节点为不同节点。
可选地，所述第一设备包括如下任一项：
在所述源节点为第一网络侧设备的情况下，所述第一设备包括核心网节点或所述第一网络侧设备；
在所述源节点为第一终端的情况下，所述第一设备包括核心网节点、所述第一终端或所述第一终端接入的第二网络侧设备。
可选地，所述第一设备与所述源节点不同；
感知方式切换装置300还包括：
第一发送模块，用于向所述源节点发送第一测量请求，所述第一测量请求用于请求所述源节点采用所述第一感知方式对所述感知目标进行所述第一感知测量；
获取模块301具体用于：
接收所述源节点发送的第一测量报告，所述第一测量报告由所述源节点基于所述第一感知测量而生成。
可选地，所述第一发送模块具体用于：
在确定目标事件发生的情况下，向所述源节点发送第一测量请求；
其中，所述目标事件包括如下至少一项：
所述感知目标的状态发生变化；
所述源节点的位置发生变化；
所述感知目标所在感知区域的环境发生变化；
所述源节点可用的感知资源发生变化；
所述源节点的感知测量量的测量值达到第一预设门限；
所述源节点的通信测量量的测量值达到第二预设门限。
可选地，感知方式切换装置300还包括：
第二发送模块，用于向所述源节点发送第一测量配置信息，所述第一测量配置信息用于所述源节点进行所述第一感知测量。
可选地，所述第一测量配置信息包含在所述第一测量请求中。
可选地，所述第一设备与所述源节点相同；
感知方式切换装置300还包括：
第三发送模块，用于向第二设备发送所述第一测量报告，所述第二设备包括核心网节点或所述源节点接入的网络侧设备。
可选地，所述第一设备与所述源节点相同；
获取模块301具体用于：
在确定目标事件发生的情况下，获取第一测量报告；
其中，所述目标事件包括如下至少一项：
所述感知目标的状态发生变化；
所述源节点的位置发生变化；
所述感知目标所在感知区域的环境发生变化；
所述源节点可用的感知资源发生变化；
所述源节点的感知测量量的测量值达到第三预设门限；
所述源节点的通信测量量的测量值达到第四预设门限。
可选地，感知方式切换装置300还包括：
第四发送模块，用于在确定发起对所述感知目标的感知方式由所述第一感知方式切换为所述第二感知方式的情况下，向N个第一候选节点发送第一请求消息，所述第一请求消息用于请求至少一个目标候选节点采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量，N为大于或等于1的整数；
接收所述N个第一候选节点中的至少一个第一候选节点发送的反馈消息，所述反馈消息用于指示所述目标候选节点是否同意采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量。
可选地，所述反馈消息包括如下至少一项：
第一反馈消息，由所述第一候选节点根据所述第一请求消息确定，用于指示所述第一候选节点是否同意采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量，所述目标候选节点包括所述第一候选节点；
第二反馈消息，由第二候选节点根据所述第一候选节点发送的第二请求消息确定，用于指示所述第二候选节点是否同意采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量，所述第二请求消息用于请求所述第二候选节点采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量，所述目标候选节点包括所述第二候选节点。
可选地，感知方式切换装置300还包括：
第五发送模块，用于向第二设备发送第一指示消息，所述第二设备包括核心网节点、源节点或所述源节点的源接入基站，所述第一指示消息用于指示对所述感知目标的感知方式由所述第一感知方式切换为第二感知方式。
可选地，感知方式切换装置300还包括：
第二确定模块，用于在确定发起对所述感知目标的感知方式由所述第一感知方式切换为所述第二感知方式的情况下，确定所述第二感知方式的交互类型；
所述第一设备向N个第一候选节点发送第一请求消息，包括：
所述第一设备根据所述第二感知方式的交互类型，向N个第一候选节点发送第一请求消息；
其中，所述第二感知方式的交互类型包括以下任一项：
第一交互类型，所述第二感知方式的信号发送节点和信号接收节点为不同的两个网络侧设备；
第二交互类型，所述第二感知方式的信号发送节点和信号接收节点中的一者为网络侧设备，另一者为终端；
第三交互类型，所述第二感知方式的信号发送节点和信号接收节点为不同的两个终端。
可选地，感知方式切换装置300根据如下至少一项确定所述N个第一候选节点：
候选节点的位置信息；
候选节点的天线面板朝向信息；
候选节点的状态信息；
候选节点的感知能力信息；
候选节点可用的感知资源信息；
候选节点的信道状态信息。
可选地，在所述反馈消息用于指示所述目标候选节点同意采用所述第二感知方式对所 述感知目标进行感知测量的情况下，所述反馈消息还包括第一参数配置信息，所述第一参数配置信息用于指示所述目标候选节点对所述感知目标进行感知测量的感知参数配置信息。
可选地，感知方式切换装置300还包括：
第三确定模块，用于在所述反馈消息用于指示所述目标候选节点同意采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量的情况下，根据所述反馈消息，从所述目标候选节点中确定M个目标节点，M为大于或等于1的整数；
第六发送模块，用于向所述M个目标节点发送第一通知消息，所述第一通知消息用于指示所述M个目标节点采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量。
可选地，所述第一通知消息包括第二参数配置信息，所述第二参数配置信息用于指示所述目标节点对所述感知目标进行感知测量的感知参数配置信息。
可选地，所述第一设备与所述源节点相同；
所述M个目标节点中的一者为所述源节点，或者，所述M个目标节点均不为所述源节点。
可选地，感知方式切换装置300还包括：
第七发送模块，用于向所述M个目标节点发送第一信息，所述第一信息包括如下至少一项：
所述源节点对所述感知目标的感知测量量的历史测量值；
所述源节点对所述感知目标的历史感知结果；
所述感知目标的指示信息；
所述感知目标所在感知区域的先验信息。
可选地，所述第一设备与所述源节点不同，感知方式切换装置300还包括：
第八发送模块，用于向所述源节点发送第二通知消息，所述第二通知消息用于指示所述源节点停止采用所述第一感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量。
可选地，所述第八发送模块具体用于：
在接收到第三通知消息的情况下，向所述源节点发送所述第二通知消息，所述第三通知消息用于指示所述目标节点采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行了至少一次感知测量，并获得至少一个感知测量量的测量值或至少一个感知结果。
可选地，所述第一设备与所述源节点相同，感知方式切换装置300还包括：
控制模块，用于控制所述第一设备停止采用所述第一感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量。
可选地，所述控制模块具体用于：
在接收到第四通知消息的情况下，控制所述第一设备停止采用所述第一感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量，所述第四通知消息用于指示所述目标节点采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行了至少一次感知测量，并获得至少一个感知测量量的测量值或至少 一个感知结果。
可选地，所述第一测量报告包括如下至少一项：
至少一项感知测量量的测量值；
至少一项感知性能评价指标的测量结果；
至少一项通信测量量的测量值；
至少一项通信性能评价指标的测量结果；
第一指示信息，用于指示预设事件是否发生，所述预设事件用于触发发起对感知目标的感知方式由所述第一感知方式切换为所述第二感知方式；
第二指示信息，用于指示预设切换条件是否满足，所述预设切换条件用于触发发起对感知目标的感知方式由所述第一感知方式切换为所述第二感知方式。
综上，在感知节点采用第一感知方式对感知目标进行感知测量的场景下，通过发起对感知目标的感知方式由第一感知方式切换到第二感知方式，使得感知测量能够以合适的感知方式进行，从而能够提高感知测量的可靠性。
本申请实施例中的感知方式切换装置300可以是电子设备，例如具有操作系统的电子设备，也可以是电子设备中的部件，例如集成电路或芯片。该电子设备可以是终端，也可以为网络侧设备。示例性的，终端可以包括但不限于上述所列举的终端11的类型，网络侧设备可以包括但不限于上述所列举的网络侧设备12的类型，本申请实施例不作具体限定。
本申请实施例提供的感知方式切换装置300能够实现图2的方法实施例实现的各个过程，并达到相同的技术效果，为避免重复，这里不再赘述。
图4示出本申请实施例提供的一种感知方式切换方法的流程图。如图4所示，感知方式切换方法包括如下步骤：
步骤401：在发起对感知目标的感知方式由第一感知方式切换为第二感知方式的情况下，第一节点接收第一设备发送的第一请求消息，所述第一请求消息用于请求至少一个目标候选节点采用第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量，所述第一感知方式的信号发送节点和信号接收节点为同一节点，所述第二感知方式的信号发送节点和所述第二感知方式的信号接收节点为不同节点；
步骤402：所述第一节点向所述第一设备发送反馈消息，所述反馈消息用于指示所述目标候选节点是否同意采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量。
需要说明的是，本申请实施例中的第一节点可以是候选节点也可以是源节点，第一节点可包括网络侧设备或终端。
可选地，所述反馈消息包括如下至少一项：
第一反馈消息，由所述第一节点根据所述第一请求消息确定，用于指示所述第一节点是否同意采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量，所述目标候选节点包括所述第一节点；
第二反馈消息，由第二节点根据所述第一节点发送的第二请求消息确定，用于指示所述第二节点是否同意采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量，所述第二请求消息用于请求所述第二节点采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量，所述目标候选节点包括所述第二节点。
可选地，所述第一请求消息还包括用于指示所述第二感知方式的交互类型的指示信息；
在所述第一节点接收第一设备发送的第一请求消息之后，所述方法还包括：
所述第一节点根据所述第二感知方式的交互类型，向所述第二节点发送所述第二请求消息；
其中，所述第二感知方式的交互类型包括以下任一项：
第一交互类型，所述第二感知方式的信号发送节点和信号接收节点为不同的两个网络侧设备；
第二交互类型，所述第二感知方式的信号发送节点和信号接收节点中的一者为网络侧设备，另一者为终端；
第三交互类型，所述第二感知方式的信号发送节点和信号接收节点为不同的两个终端。
可选地，在所述反馈消息用于指示所述目标候选节点同意采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量的情况下，所述反馈消息还包括第一参数配置信息，所述第一参数配置信息用于指示所述目标候选节点对所述感知目标进行感知测量的感知参数配置信息。
可选地，所述目标候选节点包括所述第一节点；
在所述反馈消息用于指示所述第一节点同意采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量的情况下，所述方法还包括：
所述第一节点接收所述第一设备发送的第一通知消息，所述第一通知消息用于指示所述第一节点采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量；
所述第一节点采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量。
可选地，所述第一通知消息包括第二参数配置信息，所述第二参数配置信息用于指示所述第一节点对所述感知目标进行感知测量的感知参数配置信息。
可选地，所述方法还包括：
所述第一节点接收所述第一设备发送的第一信息，所述第一信息包括如下至少一项：
源节点对所述感知目标的感知测量量的历史测量值；
源节点对所述感知目标的历史感知结果；
所述感知目标的指示信息；
所述感知目标所在感知区域的先验信息。
可选地，所述方法还包括：
所述第一节点向所述第一设备发送第三通知消息，所述第三通知消息用于指示所述第一节点采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行了至少一次感知测量，并获得至少一个 感知测量量的测量值或至少一个感知结果。
综上，在感知节点采用第一感知方式对感知目标进行感知测量的场景下，通过发起对感知目标的感知方式由第一感知方式切换到第二感知方式，使得感知测量能够以合适的感知方式进行，从而能够提高感知测量的可靠性。
本申请实施例提供的感知方式切换方法，执行主体可以为感知方式切换装置。本申请实施例中以感知方式切换装置执行感知方式切换方法为例，说明本申请实施例提供的感知方式切换的装置。
参照图5，本申请实施例还提供了一种感知方式切换装置，可应用于第一节点。如图5所示，该感知方式切换装置500包括：
第一接收模块501，用于在发起对感知目标的感知方式由第一感知方式切换为第二感知方式的情况下，接收第一设备发送的第一请求消息，所述第一请求消息用于请求至少一个目标候选节点采用第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量，所述第一感知方式的信号发送节点和所述第一感知方式的信号接收节点为同一节点，所述第二感知方式的信号发送节点和所述第二感知方式的信号接收节点为不同节点；
第一发送模块502，用于向所述第一设备发送反馈消息，所述反馈消息用于指示所述目标候选节点是否同意采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量。
可选地，所述反馈消息包括如下至少一项：
第一反馈消息，由所述第一节点根据所述第一请求消息确定，用于指示所述第一节点是否同意采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量，所述目标候选节点包括所述第一节点；
第二反馈消息，由第二节点根据所述第一节点发送的第二请求消息确定，用于指示所述第二节点是否同意采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量，所述第二请求消息用于请求所述第二节点采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量，所述目标候选节点包括所述第二节点。
可选地，所述第一请求消息还包括用于指示所述第二感知方式的交互类型的指示信息；
感知方式切换装置500还包括：
第二发送模块，用于根据所述第二感知方式的交互类型，向所述第二节点发送所述第二请求消息；
其中，所述第二感知方式的交互类型包括以下任一项：
第一交互类型，所述第二感知方式的信号发送节点和信号接收节点为不同的两个网络侧设备；
第二交互类型，所述第二感知方式的信号发送节点和信号接收节点中的一者为网络侧设备，另一者为终端；
第三交互类型，所述第二感知方式的信号发送节点和信号接收节点为不同的两个终端。
可选地，在所述反馈消息用于指示所述目标候选节点同意采用所述第二感知方式对所 述感知目标进行感知测量的情况下，所述反馈消息还包括第一参数配置信息，所述第一参数配置信息用于指示所述目标候选节点对所述感知目标进行感知测量的感知参数配置信息。
可选地，所述目标候选节点包括所述第一节点；
感知方式切换装置500还包括：
第二接收模块，用于在所述反馈消息用于指示所述第一节点同意采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量的情况下，接收所述第一设备发送的第一通知消息，所述第一通知消息用于指示所述第一节点采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量；
感知模块，用于采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量。
可选地，所述第一通知消息包括第二参数配置信息，所述第二参数配置信息用于指示所述第一节点对所述感知目标进行感知测量的感知参数配置信息。
可选地，感知方式切换装置500还包括：
第三接收模块，用于接收所述第一设备发送的第一信息，所述第一信息包括如下至少一项：
源节点对所述感知目标的感知测量量的历史测量值；
源节点对所述感知目标的历史感知结果；
所述感知目标的指示信息；
所述感知目标所在感知区域的先验信息。
可选地，感知方式切换装置500还包括：
第三发送模块，用于向所述第一设备发送第三通知消息，所述第三通知消息用于指示所述第一节点采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行了至少一次感知测量，并获得至少一个感知测量量的测量值或至少一个感知结果。
综上，在感知节点采用第一感知方式对感知目标进行感知测量的场景下，通过发起对感知目标的感知方式由第一感知方式切换到第二感知方式，使得感知测量能够以合适的感知方式进行，从而能够提高感知测量的可靠性。
本申请实施例中的感知方式切换装置500可以是电子设备，例如具有操作系统的电子设备，也可以是电子设备中的部件，例如集成电路或芯片。该电子设备可以是终端，也可以为网络侧设备。示例性的，终端可以包括但不限于上述所列举的终端11的类型，网络侧设备可以包括但不限于上述所列举的网络侧设备12的类型，本申请实施例不作具体限定。
本申请实施例提供的感知方式切换装置500能够实现图4的方法实施例实现的各个过程，并达到相同的技术效果，为避免重复，这里不再赘述。
可选地，如图6所示，本申请实施例还提供一种通信设备600，包括处理器601和存储器602，存储器602上存储有可在所述处理器601上运行的程序或指令，例如，该通信 设备600为终端时，该程序或指令被处理器601执行时实现上述感知方式切换方法实施例的各个步骤，且能达到相同的技术效果。该通信设备600为网络侧设备时，该程序或指令被处理器601执行时实现上述感知方式切换方法实施例的各个步骤，且能达到相同的技术效果，为避免重复，这里不再赘述。
本申请实施例还提供一种通信设备，该通信设备为终端或网络侧设备，该通信设备包括处理器和通信接口，其中，通信接口用于获取第一测量报告，所述第一测量报告由源节点采用第一感知方式对感知目标进行第一感知测量而生成，所述第一感知方式的信号发送节点和所述第一感知方式的信号接收节点为同一节点，所述第一设备与所述源节点相同或不同；处理器用于根据所述第一测量报告，确定是否发起对所述感知目标的感知方式由所述第一感知方式切换为第二感知方式，所述第二感知方式的信号发送节点和所述第二感知方式的信号接收节点为不同节点。
本申请实施例还提供一种通信设备，该通信设备为终端或网络侧设备，该通信设备包括处理器及通信接口，其中，通信接口用于在发起对感知目标的感知方式由第一感知方式切换为第二感知方式的情况下，接收第一设备发送的第一请求消息，所述第一请求消息用于请求至少一个目标候选节点采用第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量，所述第一感知方式的信号发送节点和所述第一感知方式的信号接收节点为同一节点，所述第二感知方式的信号发送节点和所述第二感知方式的信号接收节点为不同节点；该通信接口还用于向所述第一设备发送反馈消息，所述反馈消息用于指示所述目标候选节点是否同意采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量。
上述方法实施例的各个实施过程和实现方式均可适用于终端中，且能达到相同的技术效果。具体地，图7为实现本申请实施例的一种终端的硬件结构示意图。
该终端700包括但不限于：射频单元701、网络模块702、音频输出单元703、输入单元704、传感器705、显示单元706、用户输入单元707、接口单元708、存储器709以及处理器710等中的至少部分部件。
本领域技术人员可以理解，终端700还可以包括给各个部件供电的电源(比如电池)，电源可以通过电源管理系统与处理器710逻辑相连，从而通过电源管理系统实现管理充电、放电、以及功耗管理等功能。图7中示出的终端结构并不构成对终端的限定，终端可以包括比图示更多或更少的部件，或者组合某些部件，或者不同的部件布置，在此不再赘述。
应理解的是，本申请实施例中，输入单元704可以包括图形处理单元(Graphics Processing Unit，GPU)7041和麦克风7042，图形处理器7041对在视频捕获模式或图像捕获模式中由图像捕获装置(如摄像头)获得的静态图片或视频的图像数据进行处理。显示单元706可包括显示面板7061，可以采用液晶显示器、有机发光二极管等形式来配置显示面板7061。用户输入单元707包括触控面板7071以及其他输入设备7072中的至少一种。触控面板7071，也称为触摸屏。触控面板7071可包括触摸检测装置和触摸控制器两个部分。其他输入设备7072可以包括但不限于物理键盘、功能键(比如音量控制按键、 开关按键等)、轨迹球、鼠标、操作杆，在此不再赘述。
本申请实施例中，射频单元701接收来自网络侧设备的下行数据后，可以传输给处理器710进行处理；另外，射频单元701可以向网络侧设备发送上行数据。通常，射频单元701包括但不限于天线、放大器、收发信机、耦合器、低噪声放大器、双工器等。
存储器709可用于存储软件程序或指令以及各种数据。存储器709可主要包括存储程序或指令的第一存储区和存储数据的第二存储区，其中，第一存储区可存储操作系统、至少一个功能所需的应用程序或指令(比如声音播放功能、图像播放功能等)等。此外，存储器709可以包括易失性存储器或非易失性存储器，或者，存储器709可以包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中，非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(Read-Only Memory，ROM)、可编程只读存储器(Programmable ROM，PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(Erasable PROM，EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(Electrically EPROM，EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(Random Access Memory，RAM)，静态随机存取存储器(Static RAM，SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(Dynamic RAM，DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(Synchronous DRAM，SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(Double Data Rate SDRAM，DDRSDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(Enhanced SDRAM，ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(Synch link DRAM，SLDRAM)和直接内存总线随机存取存储器(Direct Rambus RAM，DRRAM)。本申请实施例中的存储器709包括但不限于这些和任意其它适合类型的存储器。
处理器710可包括一个或多个处理单元；可选的，处理器710集成应用处理器和调制解调处理器，其中，应用处理器主要处理涉及操作系统、用户界面和应用程序等的操作，调制解调处理器主要处理无线通信信号，如基带处理器。可以理解的是，上述调制解调处理器也可以不集成到处理器710中。
终端700既可以作为第一设备执行本申请实施例的感知方式切换方法的步骤，又可以作为第一节点执行本申请实施例的感知方式切换方法的步骤。
一方面，终端700可作为第一设备执行如下的步骤：
射频单元701用于：获取第一测量报告，所述第一测量报告由源节点采用第一感知方式对感知目标进行第一感知测量而生成，所述第一感知方式的信号发送节点和所述第一感知方式的信号接收节点为同一节点；
处理器710用于：根据所述第一测量报告，确定是否发起对所述感知目标的感知方式由所述第一感知方式切换为第二感知方式，所述第二感知方式的信号发送节点和所述第二感知方式的信号接收节点为不同节点。
可选地，终端700不为源节点；
射频单元701还用于：
向所述源节点发送第一测量请求，所述第一测量请求用于请求所述源节点采用所述第一感知方式对所述感知目标进行所述第一感知测量；
接收所述源节点发送的第一测量报告，所述第一测量报告由所述源节点基于所述第一感知测量而生成。
可选地，射频单元701还用于：
在确定目标事件发生的情况下，向所述源节点发送第一测量请求；
其中，所述目标事件包括如下至少一项：
所述感知目标的状态发生变化；
所述源节点的位置发生变化；
所述感知目标所在感知区域的环境发生变化；
所述源节点可用的感知资源发生变化；
所述源节点的感知测量量的测量值达到第一预设门限；
所述源节点的通信测量量的测量值达到第二预设门限。
可选地，射频单元701还用于：
向所述源节点发送第一测量配置信息，所述第一测量配置信息用于所述源节点进行所述第一感知测量。
可选地，所述第一测量配置信息包含在所述第一测量请求中。
可选地，终端700为源节点；
射频单元701还用于：
向第二设备发送所述第一测量报告，所述第二设备包括核心网节点或所述源节点接入的网络侧设备。
可选地，终端700为源节点；
射频单元701还用于：
所述第一设备在确定目标事件发生的情况下，获取第一测量报告；
其中，所述目标事件包括如下至少一项：
所述感知目标的状态发生变化；
所述源节点的位置发生变化；
所述感知目标所在感知区域的环境发生变化；
所述源节点可用的感知资源发生变化；
所述源节点的感知测量量的测量值达到第三预设门限；
所述源节点的通信测量量的测量值达到第四预设门限。
可选地，射频单元701还用于：
在确定发起对所述感知目标的感知方式由所述第一感知方式切换为所述第二感知方式的情况下，向N个第一候选节点发送第一请求消息，所述第一请求消息用于请求至少一个目标候选节点采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量，N为大于或等于1的整数；
接收所述N个第一候选节点中的至少一个第一候选节点发送的反馈消息，所述反馈消 息用于指示所述目标候选节点是否同意采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量。
可选地，所述反馈消息包括如下至少一项：
第一反馈消息，由所述第一候选节点根据所述第一请求消息确定，用于指示所述第一候选节点是否同意采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量，所述目标候选节点包括所述第一候选节点；
第二反馈消息，由第二候选节点根据所述第一候选节点发送的第二请求消息确定，用于指示所述第二候选节点是否同意采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量，所述第二请求消息用于请求所述第二候选节点采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量，所述目标候选节点包括所述第二候选节点。
可选地，射频单元701还用于：
所述第一设备向第二设备发送第一指示消息，所述第二设备包括核心网节点、源节点或所述源节点的源接入基站，所述第一指示消息用于指示对所述感知目标的感知方式由所述第一感知方式切换为第二感知方式。
可选地，处理器710还用于：
在确定发起对所述感知目标的感知方式由所述第一感知方式切换为所述第二感知方式的情况下，确定所述第二感知方式的交互类型；
射频单元701还用于：
根据所述第二感知方式的交互类型，向N个第一候选节点发送第一请求消息；
其中，所述第二感知方式的交互类型包括以下任一项：
第一交互类型，所述第二感知方式的信号发送节点和信号接收节点为不同的两个网络侧设备；
第二交互类型，所述第二感知方式的信号发送节点和信号接收节点中的一者为网络侧设备，另一者为终端；
第三交互类型，所述第二感知方式的信号发送节点和信号接收节点为不同的两个终端。
可选地，处理器710还用于：
根据如下至少一项确定所述N个第一候选节点：
候选节点的位置信息；
候选节点的天线面板朝向信息；
候选节点的状态信息；
候选节点的感知能力信息；
候选节点可用的感知资源信息；
候选节点的信道状态信息。
可选地，在所述反馈消息用于指示所述目标候选节点同意采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量的情况下，所述反馈消息还包括第一参数配置信息，所述第一参 数配置信息用于指示所述目标候选节点对所述感知目标进行感知测量的感知参数配置信息。
可选地，处理器710还用于：
在所述反馈消息用于指示所述目标候选节点同意采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量的情况下，根据所述反馈消息，从所述目标候选节点中确定M个目标节点，M为大于或等于1的整数；
射频单元701还用于：
向所述M个目标节点发送第一通知消息，所述第一通知消息用于指示所述M个目标节点采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量。
可选地，所述第一通知消息包括第二参数配置信息，所述第二参数配置信息用于指示所述目标节点对所述感知目标进行感知测量的感知参数配置信息。
可选地，终端700为源节点；
所述M个目标节点包括终端700，或者，所述M个目标节点不包括终端700。
可选地，射频单元701还用于：
向所述M个目标节点发送第一信息，所述第一信息包括如下至少一项：
所述源节点对所述感知目标的感知测量量的历史测量值；
所述源节点对所述感知目标的历史感知结果；
所述感知目标的指示信息；
所述感知目标所在感知区域的先验信息。
可选地，终端700不为源节点，射频单元701还用于：
向所述源节点发送第二通知消息，所述第二通知消息用于指示所述源节点停止采用所述第一感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量。
可选地，射频单元701还用于：
在接收到第三通知消息的情况下，向所述源节点发送所述第二通知消息，所述第三通知消息用于指示所述目标节点采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行了至少一次感知测量，并获得至少一个感知测量量的测量值或至少一个感知结果。
可选地，终端700为源节点，处理器710还用于：
停止采用所述第一感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量。
可选地，处理器710还用于：
在接收到第四通知消息的情况下，停止采用所述第一感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量，所述第四通知消息用于指示所述目标节点采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行了至少一次感知测量，并获得至少一个感知测量量的测量值或至少一个感知结果。
可选地，所述第一测量报告包括如下至少一项：
至少一项感知测量量的测量值；
至少一项感知性能评价指标的测量结果；
至少一项通信测量量的测量值；
至少一项通信性能评价指标的测量结果；
第一指示信息，用于指示预设事件是否发生，所述预设事件用于触发发起对感知目标的感知方式由所述第一感知方式切换为所述第二感知方式；
第二指示信息，用于指示预设切换条件是否满足，所述预设切换条件用于触发发起对感知目标的感知方式由所述第一感知方式切换为所述第二感知方式。
另一方面，终端700可作为第一节点执行如下的步骤：
射频单元701用于：
在发起对感知目标的感知方式由第一感知方式切换为第二感知方式的情况下，接收第一设备发送的第一请求消息，所述第一请求消息用于请求至少一个目标候选节点采用第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量，所述第一感知方式的信号发送节点和所述第一感知方式的信号接收节点为同一节点，所述第二感知方式的信号发送节点和所述第二感知方式的信号接收节点为不同节点；
向所述第一设备发送反馈消息，所述反馈消息用于指示所述目标候选节点是否同意采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量。
可选地，所述反馈消息包括如下至少一项：
第一反馈消息，由所述第一节点根据所述第一请求消息确定，用于指示所述第一节点是否同意采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量，所述目标候选节点包括所述第一节点；
第二反馈消息，由第二节点根据所述第一节点发送的第二请求消息确定，用于指示所述第二节点是否同意采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量，所述第二请求消息用于请求所述第二节点采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量，所述目标候选节点包括所述第二节点。
可选地，所述第一请求消息还包括用于指示所述第二感知方式的交互类型的指示信息；
射频单元701还用于：
根据所述第二感知方式的交互类型，向所述第二节点发送所述第二请求消息；
其中，所述第二感知方式的交互类型包括以下任一项：
第一交互类型，所述第二感知方式的信号发送节点和信号接收节点为不同的两个网络侧设备；
第二交互类型，所述第二感知方式的信号发送节点和信号接收节点中的一者为网络侧设备，另一者为终端；
第三交互类型，所述第二感知方式的信号发送节点和信号接收节点为不同的两个终端。
可选地，在所述反馈消息用于指示所述目标候选节点同意采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量的情况下，所述反馈消息还包括第一参数配置信息，所述第一参数配置信息用于指示所述目标候选节点对所述感知目标进行感知测量的感知参数配置信 息。
可选地，所述目标候选节点包括所述第一节点；
射频单元701还用于：
在所述反馈消息用于指示所述第一节点同意采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量的情况下，接收所述第一设备发送的第一通知消息，所述第一通知消息用于指示所述第一节点采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量；
采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量。
可选地，所述第一通知消息包括第二参数配置信息，所述第二参数配置信息用于指示所述第一节点对所述感知目标进行感知测量的感知参数配置信息。
可选地，射频单元701还用于：
接收所述第一设备发送的第一信息，所述第一信息包括如下至少一项：
源节点对所述感知目标的感知测量量的历史测量值；
源节点对所述感知目标的历史感知结果；
所述感知目标的指示信息；
所述感知目标所在感知区域的先验信息。
可选地，射频单元701还用于：
向所述第一设备发送第三通知消息，所述第三通知消息用于指示所述第一节点采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行了至少一次感知测量，并获得至少一个感知测量量的测量值或至少一个感知结果。
综上，在感知节点采用第一感知方式对感知目标进行感知测量的场景下，通过发起对感知目标的感知方式由第一感知方式切换到第二感知方式，使得感知测量能够以合适的感知方式进行，从而能够提高感知测量的可靠性。
上述方法实施例的各个实施过程和实现方式还可适用于网络侧设备，且能达到相同的技术效果。具体地，图8为实现本申请实施例的一种网络侧设备的硬件结构示意图。如图8所示，该网络侧设备80包括：天线81、射频装置82、基带装置83、处理器84和存储器85。天线81与射频装置82连接。在上行方向上，射频装置82通过天线81接收信息，将接收的信息发送给基带装置83进行处理。在下行方向上，基带装置83对要发送的信息进行处理，并发送给射频装置82，射频装置82对收到的信息进行处理后经过天线81发送出去。
以上实施例中网络侧设备执行的方法可以在基带装置83中实现，该基带装置83包括基带处理器。
基带装置83例如可以包括至少一个基带板，该基带板上设置有多个芯片，如图8所示，其中一个芯片例如为基带处理器，通过总线接口与存储器85连接，以调用存储器85中的程序，执行以上方法实施例中所示的网络设备操作。
该网络侧设备还可以包括网络接口86，该接口例如为通用公共无线接口(common  public radio interface，CPRI)。
具体地，本申请实施例的网络侧设备80还包括：存储在存储器85上并可在处理器84上运行的指令或程序，处理器84调用存储器85中的指令或程序执行图3或图5所示各模块执行的方法，并达到相同的技术效果，为避免重复，故不在此赘述。
具体地，本申请实施例还提供了一种网络侧设备。如图9所示，该网络侧设备900包括：处理器901、网络接口902和存储器903。其中，网络接口902例如为通用公共无线接口(common public radio interface，CPRI)。
具体地，本申请实施例的网络侧设备900还包括：存储在存储器903上并可在处理器901上运行的指令或程序，处理器901调用存储器903中的指令或程序执行图3或图5所示各模块执行的方法，并达到相同的技术效果，为避免重复，故不在此赘述。
本申请实施例还提供一种可读存储介质，所述可读存储介质上存储有程序或指令，该程序或指令被处理器执行时实现上述感知方式切换方法实施例的各个过程，且能达到相同的技术效果，为避免重复，这里不再赘述。
其中，所述处理器为上述实施例中所述的终端中的处理器。所述可读存储介质，包括计算机可读存储介质，如计算机只读存储器ROM、随机存取存储器RAM、磁碟或者光盘等。
本申请实施例另提供了一种芯片，所述芯片包括处理器和通信接口，所述通信接口和所述处理器耦合，所述处理器用于运行程序或指令，实现上述感知方式切换方法实施例的各个过程，且能达到相同的技术效果，为避免重复，这里不再赘述。
应理解，本申请实施例提到的芯片还可以称为系统级芯片，系统芯片，芯片系统或片上系统芯片等。
本申请实施例另提供了一种计算机程序/程序产品，所述计算机程序/程序产品被存储在存储介质中，所述计算机程序/程序产品被至少一个处理器执行以实现上述感知方式切换方法实施例的各个过程，且能达到相同的技术效果，为避免重复，这里不再赘述。
本申请实施例还提供了一种通信系统，包括：终端及网络侧设备，所述终端可用于执行如上所述的感知方式切换方法的步骤，所述网络侧设备可用于执行如上所述的感知方式切换方法的步骤。
需要说明的是，在本文中，术语“包括”、“包含”或者其任何其他变体意在涵盖非排他性的包含，从而使得包括一系列要素的过程、方法、物品或者装置不仅包括那些要素，而且还包括没有明确列出的其他要素，或者是还包括为这种过程、方法、物品或者装置所固有的要素。在没有更多限制的情况下，由语句“包括一个……”限定的要素，并不排除在包括该要素的过程、方法、物品或者装置中还存在另外的相同要素。此外，需要指出的是，本申请实施方式中的方法和装置的范围不限按示出或讨论的顺序来执行功能，还可包括根据所涉及的功能按基本同时的方式或按相反的顺序来执行功能，例如，可以按不同于所描述的次序来执行所描述的方法，并且还可以添加、省去、或组合各种步骤。另外，参照某 些示例所描述的特征可在其他示例中被组合。
通过以上的实施方式的描述，本领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到上述实施例方法可借助软件加必需的通用硬件平台的方式来实现，当然也可以通过硬件，但很多情况下前者是更佳的实施方式。基于这样的理解，本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对相关技术做出贡献的部分可以以计算机软件产品的形式体现出来，该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质(如ROM/RAM、磁碟、光盘)中，包括若干指令用以使得一台终端(可以是手机，计算机，服务器，空调器，或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述的方法。
上面结合附图对本申请的实施例进行了描述，但是本申请并不局限于上述的具体实施方式，上述的具体实施方式仅仅是示意性的，而不是限制性的，本领域的普通技术人员在本申请的启示下，在不脱离本申请宗旨和权利要求所保护的范围情况下，还可做出很多形式，均属于本申请的保护之内。

Claims (35)

  1. 一种感知方式切换方法，包括：
    第一设备获取第一测量报告，所述第一测量报告由源节点采用第一感知方式对感知目标进行第一感知测量而生成，所述第一感知方式的信号发送节点和所述第一感知方式的信号接收节点为同一节点，所述第一设备与所述源节点相同或不同；
    所述第一设备根据所述第一测量报告，确定是否发起对所述感知目标的感知方式由所述第一感知方式切换为第二感知方式，所述第二感知方式的信号发送节点和所述第二感知方式的信号接收节点为不同节点。
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其中，所述第一设备包括如下任一项：
    在所述源节点为第一网络侧设备的情况下，所述第一设备包括核心网节点或所述第一网络侧设备；
    在所述源节点为第一终端的情况下，所述第一设备包括核心网节点、所述第一终端或所述第一终端接入的第二网络侧设备。
  3. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其中，所述第一设备与所述源节点不同；
    在所述第一设备获取第一测量报告之前，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一设备向所述源节点发送第一测量请求，所述第一测量请求用于请求所述源节点采用所述第一感知方式对所述感知目标进行所述第一感知测量；
    所述第一设备获取第一测量报告，包括：
    所述第一设备接收所述源节点发送的第一测量报告，所述第一测量报告由所述源节点基于所述第一感知测量生成。
  4. 根据权利要求3所述的方法，其中，所述第一设备向所述源节点发送第一测量请求，包括：
    所述第一设备在确定目标事件发生的情况下，向所述源节点发送第一测量请求；
    其中，所述目标事件包括如下至少一项：
    所述感知目标的状态发生变化；
    所述源节点的位置发生变化；
    所述感知目标所在感知区域的环境发生变化；
    所述源节点可用的感知资源发生变化；
    所述源节点的感知测量量的测量值达到第一预设门限；
    所述源节点的通信测量量的测量值达到第二预设门限。
  5. 根据权利要求3所述的方法，其中，在所述第一设备获取第一测量报告之前，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一设备向所述源节点发送第一测量配置信息，所述第一测量配置信息用于所述源节点进行所述第一感知测量。
  6. 根据权利要求5所述的方法，其中，所述第一测量配置信息包含在所述第一测量请求中。
  7. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其中，所述第一设备与所述源节点相同；
    在所述第一设备获取第一测量报告之后，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一设备向第二设备发送所述第一测量报告，所述第二设备包括核心网节点或所述源节点接入的网络侧设备。
  8. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其中，所述第一设备与所述源节点相同；
    所述第一设备获取第一测量报告，包括：
    所述第一设备在确定目标事件发生的情况下，获取第一测量报告；
    其中，所述目标事件包括如下至少一项：
    所述感知目标的状态发生变化；
    所述源节点的位置发生变化；
    所述感知目标所在感知区域的环境发生变化；
    所述源节点可用的感知资源发生变化；
    所述源节点的感知测量量的测量值达到第三预设门限；
    所述源节点的通信测量量的测量值达到第四预设门限。
  9. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其中，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一设备在确定发起对所述感知目标的感知方式由所述第一感知方式切换为所述第二感知方式的情况下，所述第一设备向N个第一候选节点发送第一请求消息，所述第一请求消息用于请求至少一个目标候选节点采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量，N为大于或等于1的整数；
    所述第一设备接收所述N个第一候选节点中的至少一个第一候选节点发送的反馈消息，所述反馈消息用于指示所述目标候选节点是否同意采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量。
  10. 根据权利要求9所述的方法，其中，所述反馈消息包括如下至少一项：
    第一反馈消息，由所述第一候选节点根据所述第一请求消息确定，用于指示所述第一候选节点是否同意采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量，所述目标候选节点包括所述第一候选节点；
    第二反馈消息，由第二候选节点根据所述第一候选节点发送的第二请求消息确定，用于指示所述第二候选节点是否同意采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量，所述第二请求消息用于请求所述第二候选节点采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量，所述目标候选节点包括所述第二候选节点。
  11. 根据权利要求9所述的方法，其中，在所述第一设备向N个第一候选节点发送第一请求消息之后，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一设备向第二设备发送第一指示消息，所述第二设备包括核心网节点、源节点 或所述源节点的源接入基站，所述第一指示消息用于指示对所述感知目标的感知方式由所述第一感知方式切换为第二感知方式。
  12. 根据权利要求9所述的方法，其中，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一设备在确定发起对所述感知目标的感知方式由所述第一感知方式切换为所述第二感知方式的情况下，确定所述第二感知方式的交互类型；
    所述第一设备向N个第一候选节点发送第一请求消息，包括：
    所述第一设备根据所述第二感知方式的交互类型，向N个第一候选节点发送第一请求消息；
    其中，所述第二感知方式的交互类型包括以下任一项：
    第一交互类型，所述第二感知方式的信号发送节点和信号接收节点为不同的两个网络侧设备；
    第二交互类型，所述第二感知方式的信号发送节点和信号接收节点中的一者为网络侧设备，另一者为终端；
    第三交互类型，所述第二感知方式的信号发送节点和信号接收节点为不同的两个终端。
  13. 根据权利要求9所述的方法，其中，所述第一设备根据如下至少一项确定所述N个第一候选节点：
    候选节点的位置信息；
    候选节点的天线面板朝向信息；
    候选节点的状态信息；
    候选节点的感知能力信息；
    候选节点可用的感知资源信息；
    候选节点的信道状态信息。
  14. 根据权利要求9所述的方法，其中，在所述反馈消息用于指示所述目标候选节点同意采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量的情况下，所述反馈消息还包括第一参数配置信息，所述第一参数配置信息用于指示所述目标候选节点对所述感知目标进行感知测量的感知参数配置信息。
  15. 根据权利要求9所述的方法，其中，在所述反馈消息用于指示所述目标候选节点同意采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量的情况下，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一设备根据所述反馈消息，从所述目标候选节点中确定M个目标节点，M为大于或等于1的整数；
    所述第一设备向所述M个目标节点发送第一通知消息，所述第一通知消息用于指示所述M个目标节点采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量。
  16. 根据权利要求15所述的方法，其中，所述第一通知消息包括第二参数配置信息，所述第二参数配置信息用于指示所述目标节点对所述感知目标进行感知测量的感知参数配置信息。
  17. 根据权利要求15所述的方法，其中，所述第一设备与所述源节点相同；
    所述M个目标节点中的一者为所述源节点，或者，所述M个目标节点均不为所述源节点。
  18. 根据权利要求15所述的方法，其中，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一设备向所述M个目标节点发送第一信息，所述第一信息包括如下至少一项：
    所述源节点对所述感知目标的感知测量量的历史测量值；
    所述源节点对所述感知目标的历史感知结果；
    所述感知目标的指示信息；
    所述感知目标所在感知区域的先验信息。
  19. 根据权利要求15所述的方法，其中，所述第一设备与所述源节点不同，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一设备向所述源节点发送第二通知消息，所述第二通知消息用于指示所述源节点停止采用所述第一感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量。
  20. 根据权利要求19所述的方法，其中，所述第一设备向所述源节点发送第二通知消息，包括：
    所述第一设备在接收到第三通知消息的情况下，向所述源节点发送所述第二通知消息，所述第三通知消息用于指示所述目标节点采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行了至少一次感知测量，并获得至少一个感知测量量的测量值或至少一个感知结果。
  21. 根据权利要求15所述的方法，其中，所述第一设备与所述源节点相同，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一设备停止采用所述第一感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量。
  22. 根据权利要求21所述的方法，其中，所述第一设备停止采用所述第一感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量，包括：
    所述第一设备在接收到第四通知消息的情况下，停止采用所述第一感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量，所述第四通知消息用于指示所述目标节点采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行了至少一次感知测量，并获得至少一个感知测量量的测量值或至少一个感知结果。
  23. 根据权利要求1至22中任一项所述的方法，其中，所述第一测量报告包括如下至少一项：
    至少一项感知测量量的测量值；
    至少一项感知性能评价指标的测量结果；
    至少一项通信测量量的测量值；
    至少一项通信性能评价指标的测量结果；
    第一指示信息，用于指示预设事件是否发生，所述预设事件用于触发发起对感知目标的感知方式由所述第一感知方式切换为所述第二感知方式；
    第二指示信息，用于指示预设切换条件是否满足，所述预设切换条件用于触发发起对感知目标的感知方式由所述第一感知方式切换为所述第二感知方式。
  24. 一种感知方式切换方法，包括：
    在发起对感知目标的感知方式由第一感知方式切换为第二感知方式的情况下，第一节点接收第一设备发送的第一请求消息，所述第一请求消息用于请求至少一个目标候选节点采用第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量，所述第一感知方式的信号发送节点和所述第一感知方式的信号接收节点为同一节点，所述第二感知方式的信号发送节点和所述第二感知方式的信号接收节点为不同节点；
    所述第一节点向所述第一设备发送反馈消息，所述反馈消息用于指示所述目标候选节点是否同意采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量。
  25. 根据权利要求24所述的方法，其中，所述反馈消息包括如下至少一项：
    第一反馈消息，由所述第一节点根据所述第一请求消息确定，用于指示所述第一节点是否同意采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量，所述目标候选节点包括所述第一节点；
    第二反馈消息，由第二节点根据所述第一节点发送的第二请求消息确定，用于指示所述第二节点是否同意采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量，所述第二请求消息用于请求所述第二节点采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量，所述目标候选节点包括所述第二节点。
  26. 根据权利要求25所述的方法，其中，所述第一请求消息还包括用于指示所述第二感知方式的交互类型的指示信息；
    在所述第一节点接收第一设备发送的第一请求消息之后，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一节点根据所述第二感知方式的交互类型，向所述第二节点发送所述第二请求消息；
    其中，所述第二感知方式的交互类型包括以下任一项：
    第一交互类型，所述第二感知方式的信号发送节点和信号接收节点为不同的两个网络侧设备；
    第二交互类型，所述第二感知方式的信号发送节点和信号接收节点中的一者为网络侧设备，另一者为终端；
    第三交互类型，所述第二感知方式的信号发送节点和信号接收节点为不同的两个终端。
  27. 根据权利要求24所述的方法，其中，在所述反馈消息用于指示所述目标候选节点同意采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量的情况下，所述反馈消息还包括第一参数配置信息，所述第一参数配置信息用于指示所述目标候选节点对所述感知目标进行感知测量的感知参数配置信息。
  28. 根据权利要求24所述的方法，其中，所述目标候选节点包括所述第一节点；
    在所述反馈消息用于指示所述第一节点同意采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标 进行感知测量的情况下，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一节点接收所述第一设备发送的第一通知消息，所述第一通知消息用于指示所述第一节点采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量；
    所述第一节点采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量。
  29. 根据权利要求28所述的方法，其中，所述第一通知消息包括第二参数配置信息，所述第二参数配置信息用于指示所述第一节点对所述感知目标进行感知测量的感知参数配置信息。
  30. 根据权利要求28所述的方法，其中，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一节点接收所述第一设备发送的第一信息，所述第一信息包括如下至少一项：
    源节点对所述感知目标的感知测量量的历史测量值；
    源节点对所述感知目标的历史感知结果；
    所述感知目标的指示信息；
    所述感知目标所在感知区域的先验信息。
  31. 根据权利要求28所述的方法，其中，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一节点向所述第一设备发送第三通知消息，所述第三通知消息用于指示所述第一节点采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行了至少一次感知测量，并获得至少一个感知测量量的测量值或至少一个感知结果。
  32. 一种感知方式切换装置，应用于第一设备，包括：
    获取模块，用于获取第一测量报告，所述第一测量报告由源节点采用第一感知方式对感知目标进行第一感知测量而生成，所述第一感知方式的信号发送节点和所述第一感知方式的信号接收节点为同一节点，所述第一设备与所述源节点相同或不同；
    第一确定模块，用于根据所述第一测量报告，确定是否发起对所述感知目标的感知方式由所述第一感知方式切换为第二感知方式，所述第二感知方式的信号发送节点和所述第二感知方式的信号接收节点为不同节点。
  33. 一种感知方式切换装置，应用于第一节点，包括：
    第一接收模块，用于在发起对感知目标的感知方式由第一感知方式切换为第二感知方式的情况下，接收第一设备发送的第一请求消息，所述第一请求消息用于请求至少一个目标候选节点采用第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量，所述第一感知方式的信号发送节点和所述第一感知方式的信号接收节点为同一节点，所述第二感知方式的信号发送节点和所述第二感知方式的信号接收节点为不同节点；
    第一发送模块，用于向所述第一设备发送反馈消息，所述反馈消息用于指示所述目标候选节点是否同意采用所述第二感知方式对所述感知目标进行感知测量。
  34. 一种通信设备，包括处理器和存储器，所述存储器存储可在所述处理器上运行的程序或指令，所述程序或指令被所述处理器执行时实现如权利要求1-23中任一项所述的感知方式切换方法的步骤，或者实现如权利要求24-31中任一项所述的感知方式切换方法 的步骤。
  35. 一种可读存储介质，所述可读存储介质上存储程序或指令，所述程序或指令被处理器执行时实现如权利要求1-23中任一项所述的感知方式切换方法的步骤，或者实现如权利要求24至31中任一项所述的感知方式切换方法的步骤。
PCT/CN2023/096091 2022-05-30 2023-05-24 感知方式切换方法、装置、通信设备及存储介质 WO2023231868A1 (zh)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202210605844.3 2022-05-30
CN202210605844.3A CN117202223A (zh) 2022-05-30 2022-05-30 感知方式切换方法、装置、通信设备及存储介质

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2023231868A1 true WO2023231868A1 (zh) 2023-12-07

Family

ID=88992909

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2023/096091 WO2023231868A1 (zh) 2022-05-30 2023-05-24 感知方式切换方法、装置、通信设备及存储介质

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN117202223A (zh)
WO (1) WO2023231868A1 (zh)

Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN101151913A (zh) * 2005-04-07 2008-03-26 摩托罗拉公司 自动学习地理感知切换方法和系统
CN102857305A (zh) * 2011-06-28 2013-01-02 中兴通讯股份有限公司 一种多节点联合的频谱感知方法和系统
US20160191120A1 (en) * 2014-12-31 2016-06-30 Freelinc Technologies Inc. Spatially aware wireless network
US20200175339A1 (en) * 2018-12-04 2020-06-04 Here Global B.V. Method and apparatus for providing a low-power perception architecture
CN114402222A (zh) * 2019-09-09 2022-04-26 华为技术有限公司 用于在无线通信网络中配置感知信号的系统和方法
CN114554562A (zh) * 2022-04-14 2022-05-27 中国联合网络通信集团有限公司 邻区切换方法、装置、基站及存储介质

Patent Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN101151913A (zh) * 2005-04-07 2008-03-26 摩托罗拉公司 自动学习地理感知切换方法和系统
CN102857305A (zh) * 2011-06-28 2013-01-02 中兴通讯股份有限公司 一种多节点联合的频谱感知方法和系统
US20160191120A1 (en) * 2014-12-31 2016-06-30 Freelinc Technologies Inc. Spatially aware wireless network
US20200175339A1 (en) * 2018-12-04 2020-06-04 Here Global B.V. Method and apparatus for providing a low-power perception architecture
CN114402222A (zh) * 2019-09-09 2022-04-26 华为技术有限公司 用于在无线通信网络中配置感知信号的系统和方法
CN114554562A (zh) * 2022-04-14 2022-05-27 中国联合网络通信集团有限公司 邻区切换方法、装置、基站及存储介质

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
XIAO MI: "3GPP based Wireless Sensing Services", 3GPP TSG SA1 MEETING #96E, S1-214101, 29 October 2021 (2021-10-29), XP052072630 *

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN117202223A (zh) 2023-12-08

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2023116755A1 (zh) 定位感知方法、感知测量方法、装置、终端及网络侧设备
KR20230032994A (ko) 무선 통신 시스템에서 통신 및 감지를 위한 전력 제어 및 빔 관리
US20240155394A1 (en) Sensing method and apparatus, terminal, and network device
US20240154708A1 (en) Sensing method, apparatus, and network device
CN115604728A (zh) 通信感知方法、装置及网络设备
WO2023093644A1 (zh) 无线感知方法、装置、网络侧设备和终端
WO2023093646A1 (zh) 无线感知方法、装置、网络侧设备和终端
WO2023093645A1 (zh) 无线感知方法、装置和网络侧设备
WO2023231868A1 (zh) 感知方式切换方法、装置、通信设备及存储介质
WO2023231846A1 (zh) 感知方式切换处理方法、装置、通信设备及可读存储介质
WO2023231842A1 (zh) 感知方式切换方法、装置、终端及网络侧设备
WO2023231867A1 (zh) 感知方式切换方法、装置及通信设备
WO2024051619A1 (zh) 切换处理方法、装置及设备
WO2023174345A1 (zh) 感知处理方法、装置、通信设备及可读存储介质
WO2023231840A1 (zh) 测量处理方法、装置、通信设备及可读存储介质
WO2023231844A1 (zh) 感知测量方法、装置、设备、终端和存储介质
WO2024061065A1 (zh) 前导码发送方法、终端及存储介质
WO2023231870A1 (zh) 通信方法、装置、终端、网络侧设备及核心网设备
WO2023231919A1 (zh) 无线感知条件切换方法及设备
WO2023185921A1 (zh) 信息指示方法、指示获取方法、装置、设备和存储介质
WO2023231921A1 (zh) 无线感知切换方法及设备
WO2023226826A1 (zh) 感知方法、装置及通信设备
WO2023231865A1 (zh) 感知终端的选择方法、装置及通信设备
WO2024027538A1 (zh) 感知处理方法、装置、终端及网络侧设备
WO2024099152A1 (zh) 信息传输方法、装置及通信设备

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 23815052

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1